JP2021137668A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a highly convenient game machine that can deal with a problem related to a setting value.SOLUTION: When power supply is stopped in a setting change state where a set value can be changed, it can be controlled to the setting change state or the power can be restored in the setting change state when the power has been stopped, even when the power supply is supplied without performing ON operation of setting operation means used for operation related to the set value and/or the ON operation of specific operation means used for the operation to delete information related to the progress of a game. When power supply is stopped in the setting change state and the game state is controlled to the setting change state without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means, the set value can be determined to the changed set value, when the ON operation of the setting operation means is performed and then OFF operation is performed. An information screen in which history information is displayed as information related to the setting operation information allows performing of a first display in which the information screen is not displayed and then a second display in which the information screen is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays a variable symbol based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Patent Document 1). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-206588 (see, for example, paragraph [0063])

However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems will occur, such as changes in.

Further, since the above set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person, and convenience is also required for the management.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on the set value related to the advantage for the player, and a storage means (for example, a storage means) capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the set value. The first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) having the main RAM 103) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) that controls the contents displayed on the predetermined display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The first control means
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, a state control means (for example, a step) that controls the setting to a setting changing state in which the set value can be changed. The main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of S24 and
When the setting operation means is turned off after the setting value is changed in the setting change state, the setting value fixing means (for example, in step S2480) for fixing the setting value to the changed setting value. The main CPU 101) that executes processing and
A transmission means capable of transmitting setting operation information indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed (for example, a command output port 106 or a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) and
Have,
The state control means
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is controlled to the setting change state. It is possible to restore power (for example, execute the process of step S24 when it is determined to be NO in step S21) in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped.
The set value determining means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state and the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, when the setting operation means is further turned OFF after being turned ON. In addition, the set value can be confirmed as the set value after being changed.
The second control means
The information screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIGS. 61 and 66) in which the history information is displayed as at least the information related to the setting operation information is displayed on the first display (for example, the password request display of S3101) in which the information screen is not displayed. By performing the process, displaying the password request screen of FIG. 80), and then performing the second display (for example, setting change / confirmation history screen display process of S3120, FIGS. 61 and 66) in which the information screen is displayed. Can be displayed,
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if, for example, a power failure occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored in the state where the setting is changed when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is maintained properly. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like in the setting change state. Further, the information screen in which the history information is shown as the information related to the setting operation information can be displayed by performing the first display in which the information screen is not displayed and then performing the second display in which the information screen is displayed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. This is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the figure which shows the operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. This is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. This is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of a big hit of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selectivity of a main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. This is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game permission processing. (A) A flowchart showing an example of the setting process, and (b) a flowchart showing another example of the setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backup clear process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game return processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening prize detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving number subtraction processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table setting processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a message setting process by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is a table which shows an example of the selection rate of the limiter number of times in the pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 1 for each set value. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a right gate for continuous operation of an accessory in the pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 4. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu task executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu redisplay process is executed. This is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A screen indicating that the backup clear process was executed without the setting change process, (c) the backup clear process without the setting change process was executed, and a start port error winning error occurred. This is the screen after the notification period has elapsed, indicating that the backup clear process has been executed. This is another example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart in the case where the sub CPU 201 executes a setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu processing executed by a sub CPU. This is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, and is the flowchart which continues from FIG. 59. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can perform a page update in a setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen which each history data was cleared in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example of the initial screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows an example when "setting display" is selected. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example of the page update screen which can perform page update. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the setting change / confirmation history screen which can confirm a setting value is displayed in the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the maintenance process executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the figure showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. be. This is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the example of the screen which is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the input password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. On the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set values can be confirmed is displayed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until it is done. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the volume switch which generates the volume password applied to the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the figure showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. be. This is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine which constitutes the gaming system which concerns on modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal and the server device of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the 2D code in the pachinko game machine of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2D code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG.

[1. Configuration of gaming machines]
[1-1. Appearance composition]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a group of operation buttons. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display units. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is the direction in the front view. Therefore, for example, "left" is described in the right direction of the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, so "right" on the drawing is "left" in the front view. Similarly, in the case where "right" is described in the left direction of the drawing, the "left" on the drawing becomes the "right" in the front view for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit. It includes 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front surface side. Support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting means for producing a notification or an effect by light, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be executed, and may be, for example, a lamp or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when the select button 664 is referred to, it means a general term for the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hall menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, the upper plate 26 or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is a lower front portion of the base door 12 and is arranged below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are launched from the launching device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on the result of a jackpot determination of a special symbol described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 26 is paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the launching handle 32 is operated by the player in the launching device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in response to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol (hereinafter, the big hit determination of the special symbol may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of the jackpot determination, an effect image during the jackpot, a demo effect image, and the like. The number of pending special symbol variable display (variable display) is included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the center rail 1742 described later).

In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). A sub-control board 40 having a sub-control board 40, a payout / launch control board 50 having a payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of a game ball, and a power supply circuit 338 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 60 having (see FIG. 9), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) are provided, respectively.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

Inside the main board case that houses the main control board 30, there is a setting switch 332 that is operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 that is operated when changing or checking the set value, and a performance display monitor. The 334 and the error notification monitor 336 (both of which are described later with reference to FIG. 9) are housed. The performance display monitor 334 displays, for example, performance display data and set values, which will be described later. For example, an error code or the like described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. The setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security, and are referred to as a pachinko gaming machine 1 management manager (hereinafter referred to as "game machine management manager"). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The inside of the main board case means that the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and only the corresponding parts of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case are turned off. When there is a notch and the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine management manager to expose the back surface, the game machine management It also includes those that allow the responsible person to access the configuration switch 332 and / and the configuration key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. It includes a center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes each accessory such as an upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Each of these accessories 1000 functions as a directing accessory that can be operated based on the result of the special lottery.

The transparent panel 172 is formed with an opening 1722 at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, changes the direction of travel, and flows down toward the lower part of the game area 20.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 is provided with a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 is divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flows down the game area 20, and the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The flow-down area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 52. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left-handed hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right-handed hitting". It is said that it can be divided by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later. It is done when it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

In addition, in this specification, when it simply refers to "special symbol", it means both 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting port 420 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73, which will be described later, to display the result of the big hit determination. Is what gives. A first start port switch 421 is arranged at the first start port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the first starting port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are ejected from the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handed striking.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below, for example, the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it has become difficult to arrange the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74, which will be described later, to display the result of the big hit determination. Is what gives. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected in the second start port switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are discharged to the payout port 61. Is discharged (discharged) from the upper plate to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that can rotate to the right, a start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ). The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the start port solenoid 4630. It is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball either wins the second starting port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the out port 450. Will be done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode on the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for determining a normal symbol on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passing gate switch 49a is provided at the passing gate 49 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball through the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed striking.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 is that the liquid crystal display device 16 is required to be larger in recent years, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and is shifted to the jackpot game state. Is done in.

The general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning openings 56 are arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a are arranged in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When a game ball is detected in the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 is 10, and the number of winning balls is 540. The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting ports or winning openings.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a symbol hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to open the state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary hit"), the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port is opened. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the reserved normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a is lit and the display LED 72b is lit. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened is shifted to the jackpot game state in which the round game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol and the hold display unit 76 for the second special symbol determine the number of executions of the variable display of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of pending variable display of the special symbol"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of hold of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly has a main control circuit 100 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the second special for the upper limit of 4 times are stored. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off (power is turned off).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol hold display unit 75. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the start port solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes a first start port switch 421, a second start port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. Is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the amusement park.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that serves as an opportunity to execute a setting change process or a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is for changing the set setting value at the time of the setting change processing described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that they cannot be easily accessed by a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine manager.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launcher 15 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

When the payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340. Control is performed so that the payout device 340 pays out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the launch solenoid (shown) is based on the rotation angle (rotation amount). It supplies power to the wheel and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to light of the LED 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200, while the sub control circuit 200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the main button 662, and each of the select buttons 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d, which are turned on and off by operation, are connected. In reality, select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided, respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as select button switches 6641 for convenience.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the gaming effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium readable by a computer provided with control means is used. If it is, it may be another aspect. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device or a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the program, the table, or the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal for the image data. It is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts as.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data indicating a decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying a voice signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the voice signal and generates the voice from the speaker 24.

The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LED 25 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 208 receives the command transmitted by the main control circuit 100.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out game balls and a game. A launching device 340 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure according to an operation of a game hall administrator, and the like are connected.

The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

A power switch 35 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Although the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the pachinko / pachislot machine is housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the person in charge of managing the pachinko / pachislot machine cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 in the above case correspond to each other. When the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine manager, and the back surface is exposed. , Including those that allow the pachinko / pachislot machine manager to access the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 aggregates the base values based on the past game history, and stores the aggregated results in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. This specific work area will be described later, but it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear processing described later is performed. It should be noted that the aggregation of the base values may be performed based on the performance of a predetermined operation, or the aggregation may be performed at all times so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a total history aggregation means that aggregates all base values based on the total game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present. It is provided with a history aggregation means for each set value that executes aggregation of the base value for each set value based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all base values is performed by the game machine management manager or the like, the total history totaling means executes the totalization of all the base values described above. All the base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the base value for each set value is performed, the history totaling means for each set value executes the totalization of the base value for each set value. The base value for each set value aggregated by the history aggregation means for each set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The history aggregation means for each set value can also aggregate only the base value for any set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set setting value but also the base value for other setting values other than the set setting value can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other set values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

The main CPU 101 has both a total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and a set value-specific base value aggregated by the set value-specific history aggregation means, for example, in response to an operation by the game machine management manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of these can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base values of the specific set values on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Further, both the total base value and the base value for each set value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all set values in a list, or when displaying both all base values and base values by set value in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes all history totaling means and set value-based history totaling means, and in addition to these or in place of the set value-based history totaling means, from the execution of the setting change process described later to the present. A means for totaling the history after changing the setting may be provided, which aggregates the base value after changing the setting based on the game history. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by making all or part of all the base values and the base value for each set value and / and the base value for each set value after the setting change displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game Information based on the past game history of the machine 1 can be easily confirmed.

In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering the special electric accessory (large winning opening) or the ordinary electric accessory. The ratio of the number of game balls issued (payment by the character) may be displayed. Further, it may be displayed with respect to the total number of shots, and may also be displayed as a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning opening). Moreover, you may display them by setting.

Further, an error code described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may display a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing described later, a setting checking code indicating that the setting confirmation processing described later is in progress, and the like. can. It should be noted that during the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[2. Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "normal hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random values (for example, jackpot determination random value and symbol determination random value) are displayed from various counters (for example, a jackpot judgment counter and a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random number value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol start winning, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the condition that various data such as random values are stored. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern). ) Is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. , And the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has been achieved, the big hit game state control process for performing the big hit game state is executed. In the jackpot game state, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game state control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state in the normal state, which is different from the jackpot game state, is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, the game state in which the "big hit" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as "normal game state") and the probability of being determined as the "big hit" are A gaming state that increases from the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability gaming state") and a gaming state in which a special symbol start prize is easily obtained as a result of the normal hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "short-time gaming state"). ) And so on. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts and wins during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (big hit determination random value, symbol determination random value, etc.) are extracted at the time of the start winning. ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data (for example, a random value for jackpot determination) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied is called "holding", and the various data held are called starting storage.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is suspended. The variable display of the special symbols is started in order. In the following, various data on the reserved special symbols will also be referred to as "reserved balls".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. It is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of the special symbol until. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a total of eight of the four first special symbols and the four second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines the winning of the holding ball (whether or not the “big hit” is won) based on the above-mentioned information on the holding ball, and further, the winning or not. It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on a determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit judgment counter and the random value value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 10). See the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

Next, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the normal hit is set. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined normal hit determination result and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the fluctuation display control process for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "normal hit", a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, in particular, the possibility of winning a special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not obtained, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the game ball is paid out depending on the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as various random number value extraction methods, a soft random number method that generates random number values within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random number values may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a jackpot of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a hit type when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “main symbol”). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a selection rate of the above, and FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 not shown in FIGS. 11 to 14 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

In explaining the probability of the jackpot shown in FIG. 11, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. 1 With reference to the special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), a jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), the jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “second special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing" as in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)" is set in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ) Relationship between the range (width) of the random number for jackpot judgment determined as "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data"). Is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for a range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is the "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the game state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". In the time saving game state, the time saving number of times is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the time saving number of times is subtracted by 1 every time the special symbol changes once.

In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (normal hit probability) is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric accessory 46 changing from the closed state to the open state, that is, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 is increased as compared with the non-time-saving game state. However, in the time-saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability as compared with the non-time-saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric role The frequency with which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 46. Further, two or three aspects of the above three aspects may be combined.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a normal game state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, a probability change time saving game state in which the probability change flag is ON and the time saving flag is ON, and a time saving game in which the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON are used. It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 to any of the gaming states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether the second special symbol is a jackpot or a loss.

[3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 11, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 for setting 1, about 1/290 for setting 2, and about 1/290 for setting 3. It is 1/280, setting 4 is about 1/270, setting 5 is about 1/260, and setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and setting 3. Is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, so that the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set as the set value. By changing according to the setting value, the jackpot probability is different. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the first special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. In addition, the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 for setting 1, 22 for setting 2, 23 for setting 3, 24 for setting 4, 25 for setting 5, and 26 for setting 6. It has become.

Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 for setting 1, 1/290 for setting 2, and 280 minutes for setting 3. 1. Setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 for setting 1, 1/29 for setting 2, and 28 for setting 3. It is 1/27, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

That is, with respect to the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high probability game state, setting 1 is 21 pieces, setting 2 is 22 pieces, setting 3 is 23 pieces, setting 4 is 24 pieces, setting 5 is 25 pieces, and setting 6 is 26 pieces. It is an individual.

It should be noted that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination of the second special symbol have the same jackpot probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, in the case of setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability gaming state (1/28 in the high probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low-probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high-probability gaming state).

In the present embodiment, the set value has 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be 6 stages, and can be arbitrarily set as long as there are a plurality of stages.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is configured to be different when the set value is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be common to a plurality of set values. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 and The jackpot probability common to setting 6 (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the big hit determination random number, which is a fixed value, is set. By changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the method for differentiating the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this, and the jackpot judgment value is not limited to this. By making the number of data common to all settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number according to the set value, the jackpot probability may be made different according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218, which is common to all settings, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (big hit probability is about 1/300) and in setting 2. The range from 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range from 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability is 1/280), and the range from 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability is 1/270). , Setting 5 sets the range from 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), setting 6 sets the range from 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot judgment), which has more digits than the numerator (number of jackpot judgment value data). Compared with the method of changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value with the range as a fixed value, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value, but the number of big hit judgment value data is all set. It is not always essential to have them in common. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 65535 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, the jackpot determination value data is set. The number is 219, the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is set to the range of 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290), and in setting 3, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 220, and the jackpot judgment random number is The range (width) is set to the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of jackpot determination value data is 221 and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is the range of 0 to 59669. (The jackpot probability is about 1/270), and in setting 5, the number of jackpot determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1/260). In setting 6, the number of jackpot determination value data is 223, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even if both the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is changed according to the set value, the method and the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the jackpot judgment random number as a fixed value. In comparison, the jackpot probability for each set value can be set in detail.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check process (see FIG. 31) in steps S72 and S82, which will be described later. , In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5", for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number is set as the set value. It may be checked whether or not it is within the corresponding range, and / and whether or not the number of jackpot determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number or / and the number of jackpot determination value data is out of the range according to the set value) (step to be described later). (When it corresponds to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[3-2. Big hit distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol as the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability) based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. 25.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), and Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 25.0%) ) Is decided. Special figure 1-1 is a big hit with 4 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time saving number of 100 times. In Special Figure 1-2, the number of rounds is 4, the probability variation flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed (the time reduction flag is set to OFF when the next jackpot game state is started). It's a big hit. Special Figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time reductions. Special figures 1-4 are jackpots in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the first special symbol over a fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 13, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Execute the control to stop with.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag is ON as in the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4). After the jackpot gaming state ends, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started, so-called "probability variation loop machine". In such a probability variation loop machine, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the next jackpot gaming state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is played. Then, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag as in the special figure 1-1 or the special figure 1-3). (If it is a big hit that does not turn ON), after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to a low-probability gaming state without being controlled to a high-probability gaming state.

When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol as the special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or the special figure based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Determined to be 2-2 (distribution probability 50.0%). Special figure 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time saving number of 100 times. Special Figure 2-2 shows a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the second special symbol over the fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 13, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Execute the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes a control to stop the special symbol at the determined lost symbol.

The number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state. Further, if the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the jackpot game state. The game state after the end of is controlled to the low probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF). In the following, the jackpot with 4 rounds, the probability variation flag OFF, and the number of time reductions of 100 times (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-1) is referred to as "4R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, and the next jackpot game are A jackpot in which the time reduction continues until it is executed (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-2) is called a "4R probability variation jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is OFF, and the number of time reductions is 100 times (for example, Special Figure 1-). 3. The jackpot in Special Figure 2-1 is called "10R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is ON, and the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, Special Figure 1-4, The jackpot in Special Figure 2-2) is referred to as a "10R probability variation jackpot".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but the time saving flag is not necessarily limited to this, and the determination is made based on the extracted symbol determination random number. Depending on the main symbol to be played, it may be decided whether to set the time saving flag to ON or OFF.

[3-3. Fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the flow until the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined (that is, the fluctuation time and the effect content) can be different depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the main ROM 102. Further, the execution probability of the reach effect may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, or the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. ..

As shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be determined by using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol shows the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the effect selection. The relationship between the random number range, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern), the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time, and the effect content is defined. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probabilistic time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are not distinguished. Further, different random number ranges are set according to the set values for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

The reach determination random number range is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is lost. The main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from the reach determination counter when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), and the extracted reach determination is performed. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit determination using the random number value for big hit determination when starting the variable display of the special symbol, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect using the reach determination random number. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

For example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 in settings 1 and 2. It is specified in ~ 25, it is specified in 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and it is specified in 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variation time reduction game state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set to 1. In 2, it is specified as 0 to 10, in settings 3 and 4, it is specified as 0 to 11, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 12.

As described above, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the setting 3 -Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

In the present embodiment, when deciding whether or not to execute the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, is common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and is set to the setting 5. Although it is common to 6, but not limited to this, it may be different in all settings.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is an explanation of the case where the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, but when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The effect selection random number range is a random number used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter, and selects the extracted effect. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state and the result of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss). To determine the variation time of the special symbol using. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. When the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined to execute the reach effect is It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach), is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and the reach effect is not executed is as follows. Will be decided. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B), is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time saving game state (probability change flag ON and time saving flag ON) and the normal time saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (super reach B in a short time), is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

Since the main symbol is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, what is the determination of the fluctuation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a jackpot is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a jackpot is It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (super reach B in a short time), is defined as 50 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect are the same, the variation of the special symbol The time is more likely to be determined in the setting 3 and 4 as a shorter fluctuation time than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the time is more likely to be determined in the setting 5 and 6 as a shorter fluctuation time than in the setting 3 and 4. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lottery). As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of executions of the jackpot game state when viewed in a unit time will increase, and the probability that the jackpot game state will be executed within a unit time will also increase. The higher the set value, the higher the player. It is possible to execute an advantageous game.

In the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, is common to setting 3 and setting 4, and is common to setting 5 and setting 6. Although it is common, it is not limited to this, and all the setting values may be different.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot is determined in common for all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of is different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the content of the effect. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents a normal medium super reach B with a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the variation time and the effect content. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is "05H", the fluctuation pattern designation command of "83H05H" is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designation command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[3-4. Decorative design stop design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, an example of a stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selectivity shown in FIG. 12 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot will be described. .. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 14 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

When the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201) receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) sets a stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command regardless of the set value. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special diagram 1-2, the sub CPU 201 has the same specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol) as all the decorative symbols. Since the distribution probability of each aspect is 0%, all the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in this embodiment) have the same even-numbered symbols (distribution probability 30.0%), or all decorations. It is determined that the symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (distribution probability 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is set to "7" symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if it can be recognized as a jackpot with a high degree of profit from the player's point of view, another symbol (for example, "V" symbol) is set as the specific symbol. Is also good.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 14 is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 14 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, FIG. A symbol other than the symbol shown in is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 14 correspond to, for example, a symbol in which at least one of all the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

As described above, according to FIG. 14, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is the jackpot determination of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Whether or not the game state after the jackpot game state ends is a jackpot controlled to a high-probability gaming state, and whether or not the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is 10R. Can vary depending on.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 12 is special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, or special figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON). Regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols are always stopped in the same even-numbered symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol (other than the specific symbol "7" symbol) regardless of the set value. (Hereinafter referred to as "second aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol regardless of the set value, or all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as "specific mode").

Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the device stops in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are 10R probability variation big hits, but since Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, it is a big hit in the normal gaming state. There is a high possibility that he won. Further, since the special figure 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, it is highly possible that the big hit was won in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this way, when stopped in a specific mode, the 10R probability variable jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is determined, and when stopped in a mode in which all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, the probability variable jackpot (4R probability variable jackpot or 10R) is determined. Probability change jackpot) is confirmed. On the other hand, when stopped in the first aspect, it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is not the most profitable for the player, but the possibility of the 4R probability variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the player may be notified of which jackpot the jackpot is when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or the jackpot game. It may be notified during the execution of the state, or may be notified when the jackpot game state ends. Further, although not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the high-probability gaming state is the high-probability gaming state even though the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state. It may be controlled to a so-called "latent probability change state" in which the player is not clearly shown to be controlled by.

[4. Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko machines]

The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are as described above, but the specifications are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, it goes without saying that the following explanation is an example and is not limited to this.
[4-1. Deformation example of fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a modification of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As described above, there are cases where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation example of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 15 counts the number of times the special symbol is changed (that is, the number of times the special symbol is drawn). It is equipped with a counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means is reset at the start of the jackpot gaming state, for example, and starts counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 15, in another example, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect is performed. It is performed according to both the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the time when the jackpot game state ends and the set value.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time when the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, a random number range for reach determination is determined to execute the reach effect. Is specified to 0 to 25 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is to be executed is 0 to 10 in settings 1 and 2. In settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 0 to 5, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is lost, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the settings 1 and 2 as compared with the settings 3 and 4, and in the settings 3 and 4 as compared with the settings 5 and 6. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (in the settings 1 and 2, the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 as compared with the settings 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is 0 to 1000 times. Compared with, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the jackpot game is also performed for the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where the number of fluctuations is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is 0 to 1000, the random number range for effect selection is determined so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 20000 msec (normal medium reach). Is specified as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is set to 1. It is not specified in ~ 4, but is specified in 0 to 99 in settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4, but not in settings 5 and 6. .. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B), is specified in 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 4, and is specified in settings 5 and 6. No. Therefore, in a so-called big hit situation where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the set value set is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is lost and it is decided to execute the reach effect, the starting point is the time when the jackpot gaming state ends. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of executing the reach effect. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of executing the reach effect with a shorter fluctuation time of the special symbol.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state becomes 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit The number of changes in the special symbol per hour (that is, the number of lottery) becomes even larger. As a result, the expectation that the number of times the jackpot game will be executed in a unit time will be higher, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed within the unit time will be even higher.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the jackpot game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect will be significantly different depending on the set value. There can be room for it. As a result, when a so-called big hit is made, the set value set for the player is set without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving the game ball to the player). By giving a guessable opportunity, it is possible to give the player fun. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect, but in this embodiment, it is expected that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value is. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce the decrease in motivation to continue the game even if the reach effect is executed infrequently.

In the present embodiment, the starting point at which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted is set to the time when the jackpot gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state is set. The starting point can be any time point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends in the so-called ST machine that ends, or when the time-saving gaming state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value, but not necessarily 1001. It does not have to be more than once. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that he / she is addicted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes a predetermined number or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are significantly different depending on the set value, but the set value What is significantly different depending on the situation is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol is determined to be a big hit and the time when the game is actually controlled to the big hit game state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as “ending time”) from the end of the big hit game state to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 at the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display 16 at the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production showing that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production to congratulate the fact that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method in the big hit game state (for example, right-handed) The production to teach is performed. In the ending production, the production showing the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state, the production showing the number of times the big hit game state is continued (the number of consecutive villas), and the game state after the big hit game state ends are high-probability games. An effect indicating that the state is controlled, an effect of teaching a game method (for example, returning to left-handed) in the game state after the jackpot game state is completed, and an effect of displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Etc. are performed.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the jackpot gaming state increases as the set value increases. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average number of fluctuations (that is, the number of lottery) of the special symbol per unit time, and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 where the higher the set value is, the higher the expected ball output value is (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is), a large number of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. In view of the possibility of this, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value with which the expected ball output value is higher, the longer all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time is, so that the fun of the game with the high setting value is guaranteed. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time.

Even when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the above-mentioned opening time, ending time, and jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 wins a prize for the game ball to the starting port (first starting port 420, second starting port 440). When it is detected, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check processing (see FIG. 31) of steps S74 and S82, which will be described later, is executed. Then, when it is determined in this setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721 described later), even if it is controlled to the jackpot game state. , The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[4-2. Big hit distribution and stop design of decorative design Modification example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, the first and second modified examples of the jackpot distribution (selectivity of the main symbol) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these second modified examples. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the time of the 1st modification and the 2nd modification will be described. In the first modification and the second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. Note that FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and FIG. 17 is a diagram when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol of. Further, FIG. 18 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[4-2-1. First modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 18. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 16 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 18 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the first modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. With probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 Determine one of -8. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability variation jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability). Separation probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in setting 6, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4 (both of which are 4R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both are high setting values). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, for Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but it is a high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7 as shown in FIG. , Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 75) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 4R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher expectation than the first mode) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figures 1-6 and the special figures 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is feasible to enable the stop mode of the decorative symbol to be different depending on the set value even if the jackpot type is the same. Become. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the set value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

[4-2-2. Second variant]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 17 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modification, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the second modification, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. No. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a probability variation attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled and the entry of the game ball into the probability change attacker is detected, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state, and the probability change attacker is reached. When the jackpot gaming state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. In this way, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability gaming state based on the entry of a game ball into a probabilistic attacker is also a so-called “probability-changing loop machine”.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the second modification, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the game ball is controlled in the jackpot game state in the mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker. Is controlled by. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions when the jackpot is a big hit in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is 100 times, and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". When it is a big hit, the time reduction continues until the next big hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability change attacker" is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball enters the probability change attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100%). It is controlled to a low probability gaming state with a probability close to). In addition, the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability change attacker" is in the big hit game state as long as the game ball is launched toward the placement portion of the probability change attacker (for example, the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probabilistic attacker while being controlled (it is controlled to a high probability game state with a probability of almost 100%). Therefore, in this second modification, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is referred to as the "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". The jackpot is called a "probability change jackpot".

However, if it is "a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker", it is controlled to a high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker". Instead of being controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when "a mode in which a game ball can easily enter a probabilistic attacker", "it is difficult for a game ball to enter a probabilistic attacker". The mode may be controlled to a high-probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the "mode".

As a method of creating a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter, for example, apart from the large winning opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 5) having the probabilistic attacker inside, the probabilistic attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another big winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2). In the case of -4), the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is controlled, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1). In the case of -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3), by controlling the big hit game state in which the other big winning openings are opened without opening the special winning opening 540. It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above mode as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter.

Further, as described above, when a large winning opening 540 having a probabilistic attacker inside and another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a probabilistic attacker are provided, a large winning prize is opened in the big hit game state. You may make the mouth have a setting difference. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easier to select a big hit game state in which other big winning openings are opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is easier than other big winning openings. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened, such as the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 17, in such a second modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1-4, Special Figure 1-5, Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-7, and It is decided to be one of the special figures 1-8. However, in this second modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability variation jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability). Separation probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in setting 6, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4 (both of which are 4R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both are high setting values). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, for Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but it is a high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7 as shown in FIG. , Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 75) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 4R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher expectation than the first mode) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figures 1-6 and the special figures 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

As described above, in the second modified example as well, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the jackpot type is the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make the stopping mode of the symbol different. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the set value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

In both the first modification and the second modification described above, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value by making the selection rate of the main symbol different according to the set value. doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol is controlled according to the set value. The stop symbol of is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different depending on the set value by the control by the sub CPU 201.

According to the first modification and the second modification described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the time saving inrush rate. It will be possible.

[5. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 40. However, in the following description (explanation of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[5-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on processing (step S10), a setting process related to the set value (step S20), and a game return process (step). S30) and are executed in order. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when a power failure occurs or the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to an OFF operation of the power switch 35 or the like, Performs the processing when a power failure occurs, which will be described later.

[5-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), and then performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S13). After that, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 activates the switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S20. For example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like are used. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 activates the switches involved in the setting (step S15), then performs a read process (step S16) for each switch, and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 20), the game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of the game, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. .. The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag that identifies the status at the time of the previous power failure. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, there is a high possibility that the power is cut off before the setting change process is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game is allowed to be executed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure can be identified. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON before the power is cut. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power is cut off. Further, even when a power failure occurs during the abnormal state of steps S722 to S727, which will be described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. In the initial state where the power has not been turned on yet, or when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long period of time, the power failure status identification flag is OFF. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S1710, the main CPU 101 moves to step S1720 when the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and when the power failure status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710), the game permission flag. Is turned OFF (step S1750), and then the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The check of this work area also includes a check of whether or not the set value data set is within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in the present embodiment).

The work area of the main RAM 103 is a general work area in which data is cleared when the backup clear process described later is performed, and data is held without being cleared in principle even if the backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. For example, performance display data, set setting value data, and the like are stored in this specific work area. It is the data which shows the set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data of "0" to "5" corresponds to each of the set values "1" to "6" in six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if it is normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740, and if it is not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in this embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S1740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned ON. Is determined to be. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or an abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and when the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process is terminated. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process proceeds to step S1770.

In this specification, the power failure that occurs during the normal game, the power failure that occurs during the setting confirmation process, and the power failure that occurs during the setting change process are regarded as normal power failures, and steps S722 to S727 will be described later. The power failure that occurs in is regarded as an abnormal power failure.

In step S1770, whether or not the power of the main CPU 101 is turned on (the operation of turning on the power switch 35 is performed) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. Whether or not it is determined, if the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1780, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). And step S1790, and when the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

In this way, even if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the main CPU 101 turns on the setting key switch signal (NO in step S1740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the previous power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. If YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is ON, the game permission flag is ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag will not be set from OFF to ON.

In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process, which will be described later, needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S1810, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. When the main CPU 101 performs the process of step S1810, the game permission process ends. By displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336 in this way, the hall personnel are not in a state where the game can be executed by checking the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 (the game permission flag is OFF). It is possible to grasp that. In the present embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is only performed when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key switch 328 is ON. Can be set to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. In the above, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed. Instead, after the process of step S1810 is performed, the process returns to step S1740 and the game permission flag is turned ON. Is satisfied (in FIG. 21, until YES is determined in step S1780), the processes of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped.

[5-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 22A is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19), and FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S20. The difference between FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B is that the processing when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and other processing (step). The processing of S22 to step S28) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the main CPU 101 first determines in step S21 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. The main CPU 101 moves to step S22 when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S24). The setting process ends without executing any of steps S26).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change process (step S24) and turns on the setting key switch signal (YES in step S22). ) And the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28) and changes the setting (step S28). The setting process ends without executing either S24) or the setting confirmation process (step S26). If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are also not executed).

That is, if the previous power failure is a normal power failure that occurred during the normal game or the setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, YES is determined in step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. If the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag process (step S28). The game returns to the game (step S30) without executing any of the above, and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, even if the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure or the previous power failure is a normal power failure, if the power failure occurs during the setting change process, it is determined as NO in step S21. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. And the backup clear flag ON (step S28) is not executed, and the setting process is terminated. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). (That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and controlled to the setting change state), the set value is confirmed. Only in the case, the setting change process (step S24) is executed to move to the game return process of step S30, and after this game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are performed. ) And the backup clear flag process (step S28) are not executed, and the game returns to the game return process (step S30). However, in this game return process (step S30), the abnormal time process (see step S38 of FIG. 26 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22A, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the power is turned on. Regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of pressing the backup clear switch 330 at that time, any of the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag ON (step S28). The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a power failure occurs during the setting change process and / or the previous power failure is abnormal as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22B. In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. You may do so. When a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 are pressed. By forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24) regardless of this, when the power is turned on without operating the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a decision.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 22A, if NO is determined in step S21, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. It is finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 22B, if NO is determined in step S21, neither the operation status of the setting key 328 nor the operation status of the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 is determined. The change process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and regardless of the determination result, the setting process is terminated or the setting change process (step S24). May be executed.

[5-1-2-1. Setting change process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 22) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process can be terminated with the same setting value as the set setting value. .. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, when the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes the backup clear process. This backup clearing process will be described later.

After executing the backup clear process in step S2420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S2430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in a register, and moves to step S2440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing from the start to the end of the setting change process.

In step S2440, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal plate 323. The setting change security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2450, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays the set value "4" corresponding to the set value data "3". However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set correspond to each other, the number does not necessarily have to be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data "0" to "5" are associated with "A" to "F", respectively, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, "3", the corresponding "D" is used. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In this step 2450, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but it is determined in advance because the previous data is discarded. The initial value (for example, "1") may be displayed. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8") on the performance display monitor. It may be controlled so as to be displayed at 334. When the main CPU 101 displays a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. It may be.

In step S2460, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting change process is in progress by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520 and the set value stored in the register is stored. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), steps S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step). The processes of S2440 to S2470 are repeated).

When the setting switch 332 is pressed (determined to be YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in the subsequent step S2450. ..

Further, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register is set to "0" to "5". (If the setting switch 332 is pressed while the set value data is "5", it returns to "0"). As a result, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased from "5" to "0", or the circulation may be increased and circulated depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. It may be possible to perform both reduction and reduction.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2480. Moving to step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of step S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470.

In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed, the set value is fixed. That is, in the setting change process, the set value is determined based on the execution of the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determined as YES in step S2470), and the setting key switch signal is turned off. If the setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (step S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is only updated. The set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Even if the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470 and then the setting key 328 is returned again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). The set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the setting key 328 is returned again), the main CPU 101 is set to be stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal is turned off.

By the way, the operation status and backup of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on after the power is turned on (when the power is restored) when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure. When the setting change process (see FIG. 23) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the press operation of the clear switch 330 (the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 22 (b)). The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned on (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). In this way, when the setting change process (step S24) is executed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 uses the setting key in step S2470. It is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then turned OFF without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470). Move to S2480 (determine the set value). In this case, the main CPU 101 detects that the setting key switch signal is turned on, and further detects that the setting key switch signal is turned off, so that it can be determined as YES in step S2480. Alternatively, even if it is not detected that the setting key switch signal has been turned ON, it may be determined as YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal has changed from ON to OFF. In the above, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is stated that the setting change process is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. In addition, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure is restored in the setting change state when the power failure occurs (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, and then the state is maintained. At the time of recovery from power failure, the process of returning to the held state may be executed regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from power failure).

In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. End the process.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470, it is a command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed. The initialization command will be sent to the sub CPU 201.

When the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) is completed, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19).

If the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) is executed, the game can be executed for a certain period of time after the game is started, or the game. Information that suggests that the setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of, information that suggests that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change process, and the setting value has been changed by two or more steps (for example, setting 6 to setting 4) by the setting change process. The information related to the setting change process, such as information suggesting that there is a possibility, may be displayed on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the effect or decorative pattern performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or to make the setting value higher by the setting change process. It is possible to make it different when it is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, and when the setting value is changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed by multiple steps or more. You may.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting change security signal and the period during which the setting changing code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end process of the setting change process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. Further, a command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S24 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, and when the process in step S2480 is executed. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, etc. may be notified that the setting is being changed, that the set value has been changed, that the setting change has been completed, and the like. ..

[5-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clearing process in step S2420 (see FIG. 23). This backup clear process is a process of clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear process, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

First, in step S2421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), step S2422 Move to.

In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear process was executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, the work area of the main RAM 103 should be cleared together with the backup clear process executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. In this backup clear process, it may be only partially cleared.

In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. NS. Further, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game is permitted unless the game permission flag is turned off and the setting change process (see, for example, FIG. 23) is performed. You may not turn on the flag.

In step S2423, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF and ends the backup clear process. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is, for example, a command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 23), in step S2450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the set value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Set notification. Similarly to this, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, it is preferable to set the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[5-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 22) is a process for confirming the set setting value. The set value is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal plate 323. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2630, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating the set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays "4" corresponding to the set value data "3" as information indicating the set value.

In step S2640, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting confirmation process is in progress by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2650, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

In step S2650, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2660. When moving to step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends each process of steps S2620 to S2650.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2650 (YES in step S2650), a power failure recovery command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed in step S37 described later. Will be done.

In step S2660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and sets confirmation processing. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 22) is completed, the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 19) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 19).

[5-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), a process of returning to a state in which the game can be executed is performed on the premise that the game permission flag is ON. The game return process will be described below.

First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the error processing in step S38. This abnormal processing will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 moves to step S32 and performs a process of activating all the switches.

In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 moves to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON. If the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If a power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power failure occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of power failure recovery.

Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power failure is a high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also contains the setting value information about the set value. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 19), and a series of power-on processes are completed. As a result, the game can be executed. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure recovery has occurred or a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the backup clear process in step S39. Since this backup clear process is the same as the backup clear process (backup clear process shown in FIG. 24) in step S2420 shown in FIG. 23, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear process in step S39 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S40 and performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 19), and a series of power-on processes are completed. As a result, the game can be executed. The above initialization command is a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed (the backup clear process has also been executed), or a command indicating that the backup clear process has been executed without the setting change process. Function.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end process of the setting confirmation process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

[5-1-3-1. Processing when abnormal]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of abnormality. As described above, the abnormal processing in step S38 (see FIG. 26) is executed when it is determined in the processing in step S31 (see FIG. 26) that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31). It is a process.

First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the sub CPU 201 receives an abnormal command, it determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to transmit an abnormal command. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective when it cannot receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may try to do it.

In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal plate 323.

In step S383, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the game cannot be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. Then, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S385 and executes the power failure occurrence processing. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops in steps S382 to S384 (the processing of steps S382 to S384 is repeated).

[5-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, the process when a power failure occurs is performed.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S3851). Then, the checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly held at the time of power recovery. In this way, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to retain various game data stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure status identification flag in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 identifies the situation at the time of power failure if the power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. Set the flag to ON and set it to OFF if it occurs during the setting change process.

When the main CPU 101 finishes the processes of steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply.

When the game permission flag is OFF in this way, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. It has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process when a power failure occurs is started, it is possible to recover from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but when the processing when a power failure occurs is entered, the update is not performed. As a result, the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure, and even if the infinite loop shown in FIG. 28 is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main CPU 101 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

Instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103), a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is an advantage that a constant power supply is not required to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by the constant supply of electric power. In this case, when the power is cut off, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processes can be reduced.

[5-1-4. Flow of power-on process as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process as seen from the operator (for example, a person involved in the hall) will be briefly described.

[5-1-4-1. Flow of setting change process]
First, the setting change process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value, it is first necessary to perform a power off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, while the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled and the setting is changed. The process is started and the settings can be changed.

When the setting change processing is started, the setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change process, the backup clear process, that is, the initialization process of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notifying the clear of the work area of the main RAM 103, initializing the work area of the main RAM 103, commands at the time of initializing the RWM). When transmission) is executed, a voice indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the indication that the backup clear processing has been executed is not performed, but the liquid crystal display device 16 displays that the backup clear processing has been executed in place of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24. It may be displayed in the area.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically increased and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but when the set value is "6", the information indicates the setting switch 332. When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state ends and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting changing code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

In this way, during the setting change process, only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches are enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. .. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[5-1-4-2. Flow of setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process that is executed on the condition that the game permission flag is internally ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

In order to confirm the set value, the setting key 328 is turned ON while the power is not turned on, provided that the game permission flag is ON internally, and the backup clear clear switch 330 The power switch 35 is turned on without pressing.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 is enabled among all the switches, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. It becomes.

When the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Appears and all switch operations are enabled.

As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, in the setting confirmation process, the process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[5-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal processing]

As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally turned off, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear clear switch 330 is pressed. However, if an operation is performed to execute the setting confirmation process without performing the power switch 35 ON operation), a backup process that does not involve a setting change process (details will be described later) is performed, or just If only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the error processing is executed. The flow of processing at the time of abnormality will be described below.

After turning on the power switch 35, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled (internal). The processing at the time of abnormality is started). The reason why the operation related to the setting is enabled is that the game permission flag can be turned ON by executing the setting change process.

When the error processing is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating that an error has occurred.

Furthermore, when the abnormal processing is started, the operations related to the setting are also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal processing is started, no response is made regardless of which operation is executed, and the pachinko game is in a state where the game can be executed unless the power switch 35 is turned off and the above-mentioned setting change processing is performed. Machine 1 cannot be restored. Note that the operation of all switches is invalidated in a situation where each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, or each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example,). LED25) includes those in a controllable state.

[5-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer 700, and the like. NS.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the values of the saved registers (step S57). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[5-2-1. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes the start opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting port winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S64). In the ball passing detector passing detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game (not shown) is based on the fact that the passing detection of the game ball to the passing gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is detected by the ball passing detector (not shown). Random value) is extracted. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[5-2-1-1. Start opening prize detection process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (step S71). When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S81.

In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S74). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S75. When the number of holdings is 4 (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the process of step S80.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. (Step S76). As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the jackpot random number determination table for the first special symbol, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type are determined based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S78). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), and selects the fluctuation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , Perform the process of determining.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process. The pattern specification command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (step S79). The hold number increase command for the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the hold number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Is sent.

In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold quantity overflow command for the first start opening winning, and proceeds to step S81. The hold quantity overflow command of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the first start opening prize has been made when the hold number of the first special symbol is the upper limit (for example, 4), and the command is sent to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 31, it is determined that the set value data is normally transmitted in the setting check process in step S72, which will be described later, that the hold number overflow command for the first start opening winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Is a prerequisite.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S82. When the game ball is not detected by the second start port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the start port winning detection process.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as in step S72.

In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S84). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S85. When the number of reserved balls is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. (Step S86). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). The second special stop symbol determination process is also the same as the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value and symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol, and the second special symbol. With reference to the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the jackpot selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S88). This variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). Then, as a result of the jackpot determination, a process of selecting a fluctuation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening winning (step S89). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

When the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check process in step S72 or the setting check process in step S82 is performed. You may try to do only one of them.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is four (NO in step S84). However, the main CPU 101 starts by discarding various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 without transmitting the hold number overflow command of the second starting port winning to the sub control circuit 200. The mouth prize detection process has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[5-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101, and this setting check process is the same process in step S72 and step S82 (both see FIG. 31). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set setting value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 21) may be performed, but in the present embodiment, the set setting value is set. The emphasis is on checking whether it is normal or not.

As shown in the figure, first, in step S721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the setting value data corresponding to the setting values “1” to “6”. Therefore, here, the setting value data is “ Whether or not it is within the range of "0" to "5" is determined. When the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S721), the setting check process is terminated. If the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is in the variable display (YES in step S723), the process proceeds to step S724, and when it determines that the special symbol is not in the variable display (NO in step S723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S725.

In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 31) has elapsed with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S726.

For example, if a game ball wins a prize at the start ports 5442 and 440 while the main CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the step is performed during the variation display of the special symbol (before the variation display of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol during the variable display is not displayed even if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Even), the game permission flag is turned off, and abnormal processing is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off and the setting change process is executed, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol in the variable display is cleared in the backup clear process including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, the payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) controls the launch solenoid (not shown) so that power is not supplied. Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired and the game cannot be played.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball in step S726, the main CPU 101 shifts to the abnormality processing in step S727.

In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, even if the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. When the main CPU 101 finishes the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 moves to step S726.

In the abnormality processing in step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same processing as the abnormality processing in step S38 (see FIG. 26). That is, the processes of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 27 are performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence process of step S385, that is, FIG. The processes of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in 28 are performed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 is subjected to the setting check process. If the stored set value data is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. The game cannot be executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S721 that the set value data is not appropriate, even if the variation display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless it is input and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 related to the above hold are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data held are based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 or the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, all of them are It will be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various data related to the above hold from being processed based on the setting values that are not normal, and it is possible to improve the security.

Further, as described above, the setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), in step S724, the main CPU 101 Prohibits the stoppage of the second special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), in step S725. , The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed not only when the power is turned on (see step S1730 in FIG. 21) but also when the game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. Not limited, for example, at the time of setting confirmation processing (see step S24 of FIG. 22), at the time of setting change processing (see step S26 of FIG. 22), at the time of executing backup clear processing (see FIG. 24), variable display of special symbols starts. When the movement of the special symbol is stopped, the passage is detected by the passing gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, and the setting check process is performed at a predetermined timing. You may do it. The above-mentioned predetermined timing is an example list. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or a part of the above timings). Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed, for example, in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, it is not possible to immediately turn off the game permission flag and proceed with the game regardless of whether or not the game is in the big hit game state. It is possible, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process and the timing at which the game cannot be executed may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable that various determination processes (for example, big hit determination process) are performed when the set value data is not normal, the change display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time without performing various determination processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol by losing it.

Although not shown in FIG. 32, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the normal symbol is also prohibited from stopping if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. .. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[5-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a main control main process by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S91), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 receives the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S93 and S94. A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 74). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[5-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) shown in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 34, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes of steps S102 to S110 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S102 to S110 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process in steps S102 to S110. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S102). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of pending items is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained in the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variation display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 35.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S103). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag is set to the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S103 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is determined when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S103 elapses. Determine if the result is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S105) described later, and sets the jackpot start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end processing described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and is large when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in step S107 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S107 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S108). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S106) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S109). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”), and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S109. When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-8, and Special Figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 controls to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. , When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, and the special figure 2-1 the control to set the gaming state to the low probability gaming state (probability change flag OFF) is performed. conduct.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "miss" (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. do. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S110, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S102) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "miss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", "02", and "08". Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and special symbol game end process (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "03". do. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and jackpot start interval management process (step S105). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening (step S107), and the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S106), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S107), big hit end interval processing (step S109), and special symbol game end processing (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 40 described later) in step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 33 also branches the processing flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[5-3-1-1. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is "0" (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and the number of reserved second start opening prizes is not "0". If it is determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0" (NO in step S114), the process proceeds to step S115, and the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0". If it is determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved first start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved fluctuation display (holding ball) of the first special symbol. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. Is included.

Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is set to the jackpot determination random value that is extracted at the time of winning the start opening and is set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot judgment table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (big hit determination) whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss" based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets in the waiting time timer the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (both see FIG. 31). .. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved second start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol is held. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the second start port 440. Is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117, executes the processes of step S118 and step S119, and then ends the special symbol memory check process.

[5-3-2. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S140.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction number counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17), and the upper limit of the number of rounds corresponding to the special symbol (type of the symbol designation command) (upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time saving number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[5--3-2-1. Time saving number subtraction process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction becomes 0. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of times set as the time reduction counter is 100 times or 10000 times.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as the time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[5-3-3. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step S168). If it is a probability variation jackpot (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S169. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, referring to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17), the jackpot with 100 time reductions (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 2-1) When it is (for example), 100 times are set in the time reduction counter, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2). Etc.), set 10000 times to the time reduction counter. However, the time reduction counter is not limited to 10,000 times when the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed, and even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall. Any number of times that cannot occur realistically will do. In this way, by setting the number of times that cannot actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall in the time reduction counter, the time reduction is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. Will be done. Furthermore, when the jackpot is 100 times of time reduction, counter processing is performed (100 times is set in the time reduction counter), and when the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game state is executed, flag processing is performed. (As long as the time saving flag is ON, the time saving game state is continued).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF.

In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[5-3-3-1. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S182. When the power is not turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). The table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is OFF (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

[5-4. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 40 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 40, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any of the processes of steps S162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of reserved symbols in the variable display, and the number of pending symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the determined variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol control state flag will be added to the normal symbol control state flag, which will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 is a big hit when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 elapses. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the normal electric accessory release process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag (step S195). "03") is set. That is, this process is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the big hit determination is determined to be "big hit" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes during the opening of the normal electric accessory 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of pending fluctuation display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. Update the memory to. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol memory check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[6. Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 will execute the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the sub CPU 201. The sub control circuit main process is a process started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). When the watchdog timer is started, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power interruption process is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the operation means input process (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process for determining the effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the above effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set setting value. This setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the overflow points of the first start winning opening, and when the hold number overflow command of the first starting winning opening is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, 1 is added to the overflow points of the first starting winning opening. do. Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 decides to execute the setting suggestion effect in the above-mentioned effect mode determination process. In a non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is OFF, such as in a normal game state, it is not easy to win a game ball into the first start winning port 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's disappointment cannot be measured. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player without directly causing a loss to the hole by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state. It will be possible. In addition, some players suspend the launch of the game ball when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this respect, it is possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the above setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the overflow point of the first start winning opening reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggestion effect is not necessarily limited to this, and the first start opening winning opening is not limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the hold quantity overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to guess only once. For example, it is difficult to guess the setting only from the information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to estimate the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

Further, as described above, the hold number overflow command for the first start port winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 on the premise that the set value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process in step S72. be. Therefore, when it is not determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. , Sub CPU 201 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the overflow point of the first starting winning opening reaches a predetermined point when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (for example, a predetermined point). When the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit at 49 points with respect to 50 points), the setting check process of step S72 (FIG. 31). If it is determined that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, making it impossible to proceed with the game. ..

Further, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 31), on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is the same as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make a suggestion effect.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the sub CPU 201 sets a specific winning opening among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5), for example. Randomly decided by lottery. Then, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 during the execution of the reach effect, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, among the players, there is a player who interrupts the launch of the game ball when the reach effect having a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. In addition, in the reach production, it may be immediately found that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, the player may not start the variable display next time until the reach effect is completed, and the interest may be reduced. In this respect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. Moreover, if the game machine management manager can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko machine in which he / she plays the game is low. According to the example of, such a fear can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the specific winning opening is randomly selected from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5), for example, by lottery. It is preferable to keep it secret without disclosing which is a specific winning opening. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning openings are the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Among them, for example, it is decided at random by lottery, but it is not always limited to randomly determining a specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as a specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect, but the main CPU 101 may determine it.

If the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (both refer to FIG. 31) is performed if the specific winning opening is the starting opening. Be told. Then, the setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined to be normal in the above setting check process (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the above setting check process (NO in step S721), it not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect, but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner by the process of step S734. do. Further, even if the sub CPU 201 is in the process of changing the decorative symbol accompanied by the reach effect, the variable effect of the decorative symbol is continued. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the voice control circuit 205, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes the drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes the voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes a control process regarding the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes the accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[6-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data is correct or missing.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of production (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) is selected as the production pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as the effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31) during the execution of the game, and the set value data is "0" to "5" in this setting check process. (NO in step S721 in FIG. 32), the process of steps S722 to S726 is executed, and then the error processing of step S727 is executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illicitly replaced, there is a high possibility that the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value data is "0" even though the setting check process is not executed in step S72 or step S82, or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the value is within the range of "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S721), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball is won in the first start port 420 and the second start port 440, and the variation display of the special symbol is suspended. A command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the sub CPU 201 that has received this command determines the suitability of the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "this time set value") indicated by the command received this time. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "previous set value") indicated by the command received last time and the set value this time match.

Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and if the previous set value and the current set value do not match, the set value is abnormal. Is determined.

Further, when the received set value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes the set value abnormality processing. In this abnormal execution process, for example, an image notifying that the set value is abnormal is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and in place of or in addition to this, the setting value is abnormal. This is a process to output the sound to be notified.

The suitability judgment of the above-mentioned set value information is not limited to the judgment of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, all of the set value information received three times or more match. It may be determined whether or not the information is present, or some of the setting value information received multiple times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received two times before and the setting value this time) match. It may be determined whether or not there is. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 22) has been executed, the set value is stored in the work RAM 203 this time. However, it is not determined whether or not the past set value including the previous set value and the current set value match.

Further, it is preferable that the above-mentioned setting determination process (adequacy determination of the set value information) is executed not only during the execution of the game but also when the power is turned on after the power is cut off as long as the setting change process is not executed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[6-2. Command transmission process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a direct table corresponding to the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[6-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence / absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the directory buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, the presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[6--2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a directory table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as the slave table (step S274). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration process.

[6-2-3. Message sending process]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direction buffer corresponding to the direction table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is performed (step S281).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary directory table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[7. Expandability of gaming machines according to this embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction) are shortened according to the set value. The inrush rate) was changed, but it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of these may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "normal hit"), the normal electric accessory 46 is predetermined. It changes from the closed state to the open state only for the period of. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the open state to the closed state (that is, the launch timing of the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the launch timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of notifying the launch timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. Since this backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S24) is executed, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always performed. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process is set. You may make them different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, until a predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times), the game state is set to a high probability, and after the execution of the predetermined number of games is completed, the game state is low. In a pachinko game machine that shifts to the stochastic game state (so-called "ST machine"), when the pachinko game machine is controlled to the high probability game state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change process is performed. When the backup clear process is performed without the above, the probability change flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probability change flag is set to ON (the rest of the high-probability game state). You may try to keep a memory of the number of games). Furthermore, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the ON setting of the probability change flag is continued, and when the setting value is different from the previous time. May set the probability change flag to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the big winning opening 540 is in an open state when the count of the game balls winning in the big winning opening 540 reaches 10. When either of the conditions when the time reaches 30 sec is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the big winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for changing the large winning opening 540 from the open state to the closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of different expected values of the number of game balls that can be won by the large winning opening 540 during one round). (Prepare conditions), and by changing the conditions according to the set value, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select the condition with the higher expected value. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the large winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the higher the setting value is, the longer the opening time of the large winning opening 540 is likely to be. Be done. In addition, by changing the count of the game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is closed from the open state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to make it.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in the normal hit mode, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, but is normally electric. By making the time (opening time) in which the accessory 46 is in the open state different according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is a jackpot with the probability change flag ON as in Special Figure 1-2 and Special Figure 1-4, the next jackpot game is executed after the jackpot game state ends. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played, but it is not always limited to this, and when the game ball is won at a specific timing (for example, the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. At that time, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), a transition lottery for whether or not to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, the transition probability from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state differs according to the set value, so that the higher the setting value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability gaming state (from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state). (Lower the probability of transition to). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed when a game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. This setting check is performed. When it is determined that the process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also turned off). Set).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction inrush rate) are changed according to the set value. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above has been described, the provision of setting differences is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and some configurations may be changed. An example of another extension whose configuration has been partially changed will be described below. The configurations not particularly mentioned in the description of the other extended examples below are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment, but in the following, except for the step numbers, each member such as the main CPU is intentionally assigned a reference numeral. Not done.

[7-1. Expansion example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the high-probability game is started until the next jackpot gaming state is started. A so-called "probability variation loop machine" in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the jackpot gaming state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number") can be changed according to the set value (such a gaming machine is a "limiter"). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. 47. Note that FIG. 47 is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the expansion example 1 has a loop count checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a limiter count for drawing a limiter count when the loop count is 0. The lottery means, the loop number counting means that increments the number of loops when the number of loops is within the specified range (within the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the number of loops is the specified value (5, which is the upper limit of the limiter in this example). If this is the case, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the jackpot game state ends to a low probability state, and the loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value are provided. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, at the start of the jackpot game state, during the jackpot game state, or at the end of the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 47, in setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and three times with a probability of 25%. There is a 15% chance that it will be decided 4 times, and a 5% chance that it will be decided 5 times. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 25% probability, twice with a 25% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 20% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 15%, determined twice with a probability of 25%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 20%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 15% probability. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 15% probability, twice with a 20% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 25% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a 15% probability. In setting 5, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 20%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 25%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 10%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 30%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expectation that the number of limiters will be determined.

In this way, by making the expectation for the number of limiters different according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the more the jackpot game state and the high probability gaming state can be repeated, one chance (big hit). It is possible to make the amount of prize balls given to the player different according to the set value (an opportunity until the player is controlled to the low-probability gaming state when he wins once). Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters differs depending on the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value depending on the number of limiters. It has become.

In the above expansion example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value, but the lottery is not always essential. For example, although there is a concern that the set value may be guessed by the player, the setting value is set. The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for 1 and 2, 4 times for settings 3 and 4, and 5 times for settings 5 and 6.

The number of limiters described above may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, when the number of limiters described above is set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the number of first limiters for the first special symbol Is determined, and when the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is controlled during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is controlled during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is not incremented, and the number of second limiters for the second special symbol is not incremented. To determine. In this case, the loop may be terminated (controlled to a low-probability gaming state) when either the first limiter count or the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, or the first limiter count and the second limiter count may be terminated. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of times of the above limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When is a big hit, the number of limiters is determined, and during the loop, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the loop Increment the number of times. Then, when the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 1 is a so-called probabilistic loop machine, but it does not necessarily have to be a probabilistic loop machine. For example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine". You can also do it. The "ST machine" controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number of times"). It is a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the variation display of the special symbol (referred to as) is performed, and when the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be changed according to the set value. That is, the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that one chance (an opportunity to be controlled to the low-probability gaming state when one jackpot is won). ), The amount of prize balls given to the player can be changed according to the set value.

In the so-called "ST machine", the "ST number" can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the ST number can be changed according to the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the "ST machine" can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by the lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and setting 6 By setting the number to 75, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of STs. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of STs is different depending on the set value, it is preferable that the number of time reductions is common to all the set values. For example, when the expected value of the number of STs or the number of STs is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. , It is conceivable to set the number of time reductions to, for example, 60 times, which is common to all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect of grasping that the game is in a high-probability gaming state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games) on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games. Regardless of whether or not the game is in the high-probability gaming state, it is preferable to perform an effect in which it is difficult to grasp the high-probability gaming state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. As a result, it is possible to make the ST number of times and the expected value of the ST number of times different according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even during the loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The loop count is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) without the loop count reaching the limiter count (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[7-2. Expansion example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 2 has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 2, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. Based on the small hit game execution means for executing the small hit game and the game ball winning a prize in the specific area which became the open mode by executing the small hit game, the payout / launch control circuit is used. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

Further, in the extended example 2, the number of time reductions is set to, for example, 5 times, and a specific port is provided in the specific area. Then, for example, in a time-saving game state of 5 times, a normal hit occurs and the game ball wins a prize at the starting port. As a result, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece operates and a specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific mouth, the main CPU executes the jackpot game. Further, when the normal hit is not obtained in the time-saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time-saving game state and controls the non-time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed firing toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time-saving game state, the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area. The game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 2, at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game is made different according to the set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly performed, for example, a time-saving game state. In the above, it is possible to make the opening frequency of a specific area and thus the payout different according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and setting 6. To make it a quarter. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of winning the game ball in the specific area, and by extension, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability change flag may be set to ON in the time-saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability change flag to ON.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. When the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the above small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol displayed in the variable display is a small hit.

[7-3. Expansion example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 2-2 includes a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU makes a big hit determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and wins the game ball to the second starting port. Based on this, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed.

Further, the main CPU is in the first gaming state (for example, the probability change flag) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. A normal game state in which both the time saving flag and the time saving flag are set to OFF) and a second game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is ON). A game state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states including (an advantageous game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF) is provided. In this pachinko gaming machine, if a jackpot is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the second gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, a normal drawing gate is provided in the right side area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. When the result of this ordinary lottery is a specific result (for example, ordinary hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), which facilitates winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Will be done. Therefore, when the game is played by firing the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, the second starting port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area and the game is played. The frequency of winning game balls is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of this jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is used for a plurality of rounds. A first jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a number is provided.

Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is opened. A second jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, and when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit. It also has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU has the first big hit game execution means for executing the big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds, and the result of the second special lottery. It has a second big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when the big hit is made. Even if the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit are common big prize openings It may be good, or it may be a different big prize opening.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, and 1/7 for setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. , Setting 4 is 1/6, and setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set set value, but any set value is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same large winning opening as the large winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins a prize in this large winning opening, the payout / launch control circuit operates a payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, the main CPU makes a small hit determination in which the small hit probability is 0 when the result of the large hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit that involves the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit that involves the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU is based on the first special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. The second special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the second special symbol is provided. The first special symbol variation display control means changes and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time, and then stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the game ball wins the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. However, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If a game ball wins in the first starting port while the second special symbol is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port, even if the second special symbol is in the variable display. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Further, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the fluctuation display control means is remarkably different between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. The special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when the game ball wins the second starting port in the first game state, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable amount of time for the result of the second special lottery to be displayed. It becomes.

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area and the game ball wins the second starting port, the second special symbol is displayed. It takes time for the variable display of. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit). Even if the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is confirmed as a small hit. Therefore, it is also difficult to perform so-called aiming, such as having a game ball win a prize at the large winning opening aiming at the timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when the game ball is launched toward, for example, the right side area of the game area, a warning sound is output from the speaker, for example, under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, the game is performed by firing the game ball toward, for example, the left side area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated through the normal lottery by passing the game ball through the normal figure gate, but also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. It is as short as 1 sec, and in the second special lottery, a small hit is won with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value. Will be done.

The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state (for example, 1000 sec) is, for example, 50 times or more the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state (for example, 10 sec). Is preferable, but it is preferably at least 10 times or more.

The sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means for controlling the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). To be equipped. However, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins the second starting port, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation of the decorative symbol in a conspicuous manner in synchronization with the second special symbol. 1 When a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, a variable display of a decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the above example of the "conspicuous aspect", the liquid crystal display device has, for example, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) at substantially the center of the display area. Can be displayed in a variable manner to display the result of the special lottery. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ○ or △) that can be displayed in a variable manner (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first to third symbols occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is closer to the first to third symbols than the fourth symbol. It will be suitable. Then, for example, in the first game state, when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port, the sub CPU does not change the first to third symbols and displays only the fourth symbol in a variable manner, while the sub CPU displays the fourth symbol in a variable manner. 1 When a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, the 1st to 3rd symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the 4th symbol is also displayed in a variable manner. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins at the second start port, the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not conspicuously displayed, and the game ball is at the first start port. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol that is synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner when the prize is won.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 2-2, in the first gaming state, even if the gaming ball wins the second starting port, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second game state, when the game ball wins the second starting port, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. Since it is higher than the probability of becoming (1 / 30th to 1 / 25th depending on the setting), the big winning opening is frequently opened by the small hit game, and the time saving flag is not set (that is, the normal lottery). It is possible to increase the chances that the game ball as a prize will be paid out (without increasing the execution frequency of). Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit differs depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the ball is ejected according to the set set value. Can be made different.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. Therefore, the main CPU performs the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 even when the game ball wins the first start port during the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, in the second game state. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormal time process. That is, in the second game state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU uses the above small hit. The game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time processing is executed without executing the small hit game based on the hit. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner in the second game state is a small hit, the information indicating that the second game state is included and the information indicating that the second special symbol is a small hit are included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[7-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area provided with a specific opening. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 3, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece and operates the inside of the specific area. It is provided with a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area due to the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way and the game ball that has entered the inside of the specific area is detected to enter (accept) the specific port, the main The CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a jackpot, the main CPU performs a first jackpot game in which a round game for opening the jackpot is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state and the game ball entering the specific mouth when the small hit game is executed, the round game for operating the predetermined movable piece is performed over a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state to be performed.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this expansion example 3, the ease of winning a game ball at the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of a small hit game and the opening pattern of an ordinary electric accessory) is set as a set value. It is different according to. In addition, also in this extended example 3, the result of the normal symbol determination performed based on the fact that the main CPU detects the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits the right is a normal hit. Occasionally, the normally electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it becomes easy to win a game ball at the starting port. As a method of making the execution frequency of the small hit game different according to the set value, for example, if the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination is different according to the set value, or if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value. It can be realized by making it.

As a method of making the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port different according to the set value, a method of making the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination different according to the set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and setting 6. Is 1/10. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the small hit game, and by extension, the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

Also in this extended example 3, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the in-CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is performed. Will be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol displayed in the variable display is a small hit.

[7-5. Expansion example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is not immediately controlled to the jackpot game state by itself, but the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. The condition device is operated based on the above, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device has been operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuously operating right gate, and FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuously operating left gate.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4 includes a bonus continuous operation left gate 1100 and a bonus continuous operation right gate 1110 in the game area. Further, the distribution device 1120 capable of distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 is the accessory continuous operation gate 1100. It is located above 1110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 are provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (neither shown) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball, respectively. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled from the passage detection of the game ball, and are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, the game ball moves one of the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection that it has passed.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls, for example, the 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU is in a 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which a two-round round game is executed, and 16 rounds. The 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the jackpot game state determined in the lottery is controlled.

It should be noted that the big hit is when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the game state is the same.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball that has reached the upper part of the distribution device 1120 to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the right gate 1110 (see FIG. 48), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game ball is useful. Object continuous operation It is easy to pass through the left gate 1100 (see FIG. 49).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing the game ball differs between the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, in setting 1, the operation of the sorting device 1120 is repeated with the first posture of 0.5 seconds and the second posture of 1.5 seconds, and in setting 2, the first posture is 0.7 seconds and the second posture is 1.3. The operation of repeating seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture of 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot game state according to the set value.

In the extended example 4, the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating left gate 1100, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the jackpot game state is the same as when it is played. That is, although it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot game state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left gate sensor Is paid out in the jackpot game state when the player detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, either the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). Is determined by a lottery performed with the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 1110, which is the continuous operation of the accessory, the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). It is also possible to decide which of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the more the game balls are controlled to the big hit game state with a high expected value to be paid out as prize balls. It is possible to increase the possibility of

Further, in the extended example 4, when the game ball passes through any one of the two gates (the accessory continuous operation right gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation is performed. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is activated based on the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball can be used in either of the above two gates. A game ball may win a prize at the starting port before passing. In this case, under the condition that the condition device is activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process (for example, based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port). (See step S72 in FIG. 31) may be executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 32). In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

Further, in the extended example 4, two gates (continuous operation of the accessory) in which the continuous operation device of the accessory is activated when the passage of the game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating below the distribution device 1120. Right gate 1100, continuous operation of accessory right gate 1110) are provided, but it is not always limited to the continuous operation gate of accessory that is provided below the distribution device 1120, for example, a starting port and a general winning opening. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120 uses the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120 by a regular operation to have a start port that triggers a jackpot determination of a special symbol and a general prize that does not trigger a jackpot determination. Distribute to one of the mouths. Then, the operation of the sorting device 1120 is repeated, for example, in the setting 1 for 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture, and in the setting 2, the first posture is 0.7 seconds and the second posture is 1. The operation of repeating 3 seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. In setting 5, the first posture is 1.3 seconds and the second posture is 0.7 seconds, and in setting 6, the first posture is 1.5 seconds and the second posture is 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value, the player can launch the game ball at any set value. It is possible to have the fun of being able to aim for a prize at the starting port.

[7-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not make the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but makes it possible to change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. .. In this extended example 5, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of the five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five stages, and may be a plurality of stages. Can be determined arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a probability special symbol of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 5 rounds. Control the jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to setting 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, but the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is relatively small, so-called Amadeji. It becomes possible to execute a game in a game-like manner.

Further, when the set value is set to setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to the high-probability gaming state, and when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state ends and becomes the low-probability gaming state. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The gaming state after the state ends is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probabilistic loop machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The gaming state after the state ends is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot game state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the jackpot game state. Control the gaming state to a low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called limiter machine. In the above game characteristics, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a so-called ST machine may be used in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is terminated after a predetermined period elapses and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU always or with a certain probability sets the probability variation flag ON when the jackpot gaming state ends, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , Control to high probability gaming state. Further, in the high probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when determining a big hit of a special symbol, and when it is determined to shift the game state in the game state transition lottery, the probability change flag is set to OFF. , Execute control to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it is possible to execute the game in a game-like manner in which the lottery for shifting to the low-probability gaming state is performed in the high-probability gaming state.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine can be changed according to the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, and the pachinko machine has a wide variety of game characteristics. It is possible to run the game with one machine.

In the above, in setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called Amadeji game, in setting 2 it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine, and in setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine. It is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a probabilistic loop machine, and in setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a so-called limiter machine, and in setting 5, it is low in a high-probability game state. It is possible to execute a game in which a lottery for transition to a stochastic game state is performed, but it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game characteristics according to a set value. However, it is preferable that the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine can be switched and executed according to the set value. Both the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine are common in that they may be controlled to a high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the high-probability gaming state is It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends halfway. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that are similar at first glance but are substantially different, the manager of the game machine can use the pachinko game machine in a wider range of ways. At the same time, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can improve the interest.

[7-7. Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and benefits are given based on the result of the game. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player to play the game and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also the main control circuit 100 itself The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages the game medium management device, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). Operation) or when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout action of the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player is performed, and the necessary game medium is acquired. It is sufficient that the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game can be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the game medium corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the game ball as a game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game medium" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball held (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball held. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. It can be confirmed that the signal has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

[8. Hall Menu Task]
First, the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 at a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in this embodiment.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received the setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, that it has received the setting operation command (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu display process of step S302. This hall menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying the hall menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. The hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 even when the process of step S310 described later is executed, but the hall menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hall displayed in step S310. There are some differences from the menu screen, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed. 52 and 53 are diagrams showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, when the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the hall menu screen has a hall menu item display area 1610 in the left side area of the screen, an operation explanation area 1620 in the lower left-right direction of the screen, and a preview arranged in the center of the screen. It has a display area 1630 and.

Each item of the hall menu is displayed in the hall menu item display area 1610. For convenience, only time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hall menu items in FIGS. 51 to 53, but these items are shown. In addition, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume control setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, it is not possible to end the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items in the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 1620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. In the hall menu screen, the activated operation buttons and the disabled operation buttons in the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be distinguishable. For example, in FIGS. 51 to 53, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b are enabled), and the disabled operation buttons are displayed. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

By operating the activated select buttons (up / down select buttons 664a, 664b), one of a plurality of hall menu items can be selected. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the hall menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hall menu item. For example, FIG. 51 shows that the “time setting” surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 53, it is shown that the “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item. However, the highlight display is not always limited as long as the selected item can be easily grasped by the operator. The screen in which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 51 and 52) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1630, a preview screen for a selected item among a plurality of hall menu items is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 51 and 52), and when the "setting change / confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is made. The change / confirmation history screen is previewed (see FIG. 53). However, it is preferable not to display the set value on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It should be noted that the operation cannot be performed in the above preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is previewed, the time setting operation cannot be performed on the preview displayed time setting screen, and the time setting displayed as a hall menu item is selected and decided. You can set the time on the time setting screen displayed by.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is set in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 together with the hall menu screen, for example, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. "Inside" is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice such as "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed" to be output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator is made to grasp whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without hindering the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu process in step S303. Details of this hall menu process (step S303) will be described later.

After executing the hall menu process (step S303), the sub CPU 201 executes a command (initialization command) or setting confirmation indicating whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, the setting change process is completed. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the process has been completed (power interruption recovery command) has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command is received (NO in step S304), the sub CPU 201 continues to execute the hall menu process in step S303.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

The changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timings as long as it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits the power failure recovery command, it is not necessary to transmit the set value information to the sub CPU 201 because the set value has not been changed, but the set value information is also transmitted to the sub CPU 201. You may do it.

When the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed in step S304, that is, the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command or the power failure recovery command from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is increased. It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined number N or more (step S305). This is to record the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data to the free area according to the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. This is intended to prevent the occasional situation where recording is not possible. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, but is set to 500, for example, in the present embodiment.

If the number of histories of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is a predetermined number N or more (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, and the history information overwriting process (step S306) is executed. The history information overwriting process in step S306 overwrites the history stored in the work RAM 203 in order from the earliest stored history (oldest history information).

In the history information overwriting process in step S306, by overwriting the history information already stored in the work RAM 203 with new history information, the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is eventually erased. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if there is a risk that the work RAM 203 will exceed a predetermined upper limit when new history information is stored in the work RAM 203 when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received, at least a part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203. The history information may be stored after deleting. Further, even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 when there is a risk that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the work RAM 203. The part may be erased.

If the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is less than a predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S307 and records the history information in the free area of the work RAM 203 (step). S307) is executed.

In this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S306 and the history information recording process in step S307 may be collectively referred to as history recording process.

The history information is the time information measured by the RTC209 and the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or setting confirmation) when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101. Information that the process has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information that the setting change process is executed, and the setting value information after the setting change sent from the main CPU 101 are used. The information associated with is the history information. Further, when the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 correspond to each other. The attached information is history information. When the power recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the history information, but it is transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process. It is preferable to include the current set value information in the history information. Further, the browsing history is also included in the above history information, and if the setting change / confirmation history is browsed in the hall menu process (step S303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306. Alternatively, in step S307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the free area of the work RAM 203.

In the normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, power failure recovery command, setting operation command, etc.) is immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the sub CPU 201 is started. When the sub CPU 201 does not receive a command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start, it determines that the sub CPU 201 is abnormal, and puts the game stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side. Each aspect of the display output, the audio output, and the LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the work RAM 203, stores not only the date and time information but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour, minute and second.

The sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S306 or step S307, and then moves to step S308.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S308 whether or not the setting has been changed, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S304 (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting change start command, the power failure recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. Further, in the process of step S308, it suffices if the sub CPU 201 can determine that the setting has been changed. Therefore, instead of determining whether or not the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, the changed setting. It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the value information.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change has been performed (YES in step S308), the sub CPU 201 performs the setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

The sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu redisplay process in step S310. At this time, the hall menu screen that is redisplayed is different from the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) that is displayed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. It is a screen displayed in a state where it can be executed (or during the game return process in step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 54, an item for ending the hall menu is displayed as one of the items in the hall menu. Will be done. Note that FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu redisplay process in step S310 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the operator's intention, but the setting change process. The hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S310) that is redisplayed after the completion of is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be ended at the will of the operator. The hall menu screen displayed in step S302 (see, for example, FIG. 52) and the hall menu screen displayed in step S310 (see FIG. 54) can be operated by selecting and determining any one of the items. (For example, the functional aspect such as being able to browse the setting change / confirmation history screen) and the like are common.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change has been made in step S308 (YES in step S308), in the hall menu redisplay process of step S310, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is combined with the hall menu screen. , For example, a character such as "Setting has been changed" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, "Change the setting" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the screen. "Is done" is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized" to be output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). This makes it possible for the operator to know that the settings have been changed (and the backup clear process has been executed) without interfering with the operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. It becomes. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S308), that is, when the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 is set to step S309. -The game screen return process of step S315 is executed without executing the process of step S314. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hall menu redisplay process (step S310) is not executed. In addition, characters indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed are not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

By the way, when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S310 is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the process of step S302 is executed. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, the game cannot be executed, whereas when the process of step S310 is executed, the game can be executed. However, as described above, the mode of displaying characters on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not displayed at the end of setting confirmation) when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S310 is executed. ), The mode of the sound output from the speaker 24, and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are significantly different. Therefore, even if the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, operations on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the hall menu item) It is easy to grasp from the appearance whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where it is possible to execute a game or a state where it is not possible, without hindering the operation of selecting (or the operation of updating the page, etc.). It is possible to do.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S310, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S311 and executes the hall menu process. The hall menu process in step S311 is basically the same process as step S303, but the process when YES in step S3072 of FIG. 60, which will be described later, is different, and this will be described later.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not "End of Hall Menu" is selected on the redisplayed Hall Menu screen in step S312. When it is determined that "End of Hall Menu" is selected (YES in step S312), the sub CPU 201 performs the game screen return display process (step S315). In this game screen return display process, the sub CPU 201 does not operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the firing handle 32) for a predetermined period of time in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 for the effect image to be displayed when playing the game. The initial image that is displayed when is displayed is displayed. Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return process in step S315, and then proceeds to step S316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S312 that "end of hall menu" is not selected (NO in step S312), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S313). ). Although not shown in FIG. 50, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304) and the hall menu redisplay processing (step S310) is executed, the hall menu processing (step S311) When any of the hall menu items is selected in the above, the time counting is started based on the operator performing some operation, and in the process of step S313, is the time counting time elapsed for a predetermined time? It is a process of determining whether or not, and if the operator does not execute any operation for a predetermined time or more, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S313.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S313), the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and performs the game screen return display process in step S315. Run.

Further, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S313), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step S314). .. The command to generate the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed. For example, a symbol fluctuation start command, a symbol fluctuation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game A command indicating the number of rounds in the above, a round interval command in a big hit game, an end command of a big hit game, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S314 that it has received any of the commands for generating these effect control objects, it ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen and returns the game screen to the game screen in step S315. Execute the process. As a result, the game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, an image unrelated to the game is displayed even though the game by the main CPU 101 is progressing. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S314), the process returns to step S311.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display process (step S315), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S316 and executes the hall menu display prohibition process. This hall menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hall menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed, the hall menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, and the power OFF operation is performed to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless this is done, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

As described above, the hall menu screen is, in principle, a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 during the execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the "Hall menu end" item on the hall menu screen (NO in step S312). Under certain conditions such as the operation time not elapsed for a predetermined time (NO in step S313) and the command to generate the effect control object not being received (NO in step S314), the processes of steps S311 to S314 are repeatedly executed. And the hall menu screen will be displayed continuously. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen), the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to allow the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "End Hall Menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the Hall Menu screen or the screen of the selected Hall Menu item ends and the game is played. Since the screen return process (step S315) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) can easily browse confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. It is not possible to do so, and it is possible to ensure security.

In the present embodiment, in step S314, when it is determined that the command to generate the effect control object has been received, the game screen return process (step S315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) are performed. Not necessarily limited to this, for example, the game screen is based on the reception of a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as the reception of a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated. The return process (step S315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) may be performed.

Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process that does not involve a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without setting change processing has been executed, and (b) the start port. A screen indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred and a backup clearing process has been executed without setting change processing, (c) a backup clearing process has been executed without setting change processing, and a start port abnormal winning error It is a figure which shows the screen after the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) which shows that the backup clear process was executed with both occurrences, has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 55, when a plurality of errors occur, the sub CPU 201 displays all the error contents generated in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the voice control circuit 205 (in the order of higher priority error). Sound is output from the speaker 24 via (see FIG. 9), and light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

When the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, if no other error has occurred, the sub CPU 201 is in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as shown in FIG. 55 (a). It is controlled so that the characters such as "RAM is cleared" are displayed, and the sound such as "RAM is cleared" is output from the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 (FIG. 9) is further controlled. A control is performed to fully turn on the LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red via the reference). The characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed using an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 54) in which the characters such as "settings have been changed" are displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is always executed (see FIG. 23), and in the hall menu redisplay process of step S310 executed after the setting change process is completed, as described above, " Although characters such as "Settings have been changed" are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed, and "Settings have been changed. RAM is initialized." The sound such as "was done" is only output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the sub CPU 201 uses an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 54) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition to controlling the display of characters such as "RAM cleared", control is performed so that a voice such as "RAM cleared" is output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 55 (a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear process that involves the setting change process is to change the setting value (not the backup clear process), whereas the main purpose of the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is the backup clear process. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the execution of the backup clear process is conservatively notified in a manner that does not interfere with the operation of the redisplayed hall menu screen. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process is executed is notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the backup clearing process from being executed illegally.

If, for example, a start port abnormal winning error has also occurred as another error after the backup clear process has been executed, it means that, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a starting port abnormal winning error has occurred. Both that the backup clearing process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. At this time, since the backup clear process has a higher priority than the start port abnormal winning error, the characters indicating that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed at the top regardless of the order in which they occurred. .. In addition, the speaker 24 outputs a sound notifying that the backup clear process having a high priority has been executed, and the LED 25 emits light in a manner indicating that the backup clear process has been executed.

In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed while both the backup clear process has been executed and the start port abnormal winning error has occurred, the backup clear process has occurred. Is deleted from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start port abnormality winning error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. NS. Further, the voice output from the speaker 24 changes from the voice notifying that the backup clear processing has been executed to the voice notifying that the start port abnormality winning error has occurred, and the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is also backed up and cleared. The mode changes from the mode indicating that the process has been executed to the mode indicating that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred. In this way, the content of the error that has occurred can be easily grasped.

In the above, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed. However, it is advisable to execute it even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed. In the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process, when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 when the power is not turned on. It is executed (see FIG. 22). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the sub CPU 201. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 that receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command is the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process. Can be determined, and the hall menu display process (step S302) and the hall menu process (step S303) can be executed.

[9. Other examples of hall menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission processing (step S17) of the power-on processing (see FIG. 20). (See step S1730 in FIG. 21), for example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of “0” to “5” in this embodiment), it is determined that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (see step S1730). NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the work area check process (step S1720) of the RAM 103 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, similarly to the above-mentioned setting determination process executed during the execution of the game, the set value may not be executed in step S1720 or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is in the range of "0" to "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S1730), the setting determination process (step 317 and step 317) for determining the suitability of the set value information by the sub CPU 201 The process of step S318) may be executed. The hall menu task in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 56 is another example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart in the case where the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. Other examples of hall menu tasks will be described below. However, the description of the process common to FIG. 50 will be omitted, and only the setting determination process will be described.

First, even when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed, the main CPU 101 uses the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 that has received the power interruption recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S317. In step S317, the sub CPU 201 executes the set value check process. This set value check process (step S317) includes the current set value information (set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power failure and stored in the work RAM 203) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 (step S317). This is a process for confirming the set value information (set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101) after the power failure. When it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processes of steps S309 to S314 are not executed.

After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S317), the sub CPU 201 determines the set value suitability determination process, that is, whether or not the set value is appropriate. (Step S318). At this time, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined that the information is appropriate (YES in step S318), and the process proceeds to step S315. The processing after step S315 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined that it is inappropriate (NO in step S318), and the process proceeds to step S319. Execute the process.

The above-mentioned processing when the set value is abnormal is a process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this set value abnormality processing (step S319), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal, a sound notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. The process may be executed.

In this way, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process (process of step 317 and step S318) and sets the set value. When it is determined that is not appropriate (NO in step S318), the game machine manager can be notified that the set value is not appropriate by executing the set value abnormality processing (step S319).

The above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S317 and step S318) is executed when the setting confirmation process is completed, but the setting change process is performed without executing either the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. When the backup process (when the power is not turned on, the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328) is executed, or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only inputting. Unless the setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure, and the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting value information is appropriate or not. This is because it is possible to determine.

[10. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hall menu processing (step S303) in the hall menu task (see FIGS. 50 and 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the hall menu process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 selects a hall menu item that is a target for confirming various information / settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 664 and / and the main button 662 by the operator. The selection process is performed (step S3001). In the hall menu selection process of FIG. 57, the hall menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, and so on. The case of checking the operation of the accessory, setting the liquid crystal brightness, and setting the volume control will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "time setting" (step S3002). When it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S3002), the sub CPU 201 performs the time setting process (step S3003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S3002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "prize ball information". (Step S3004). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "prize ball information" (YES in step S3004), the sub CPU 201 performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In this prize ball information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize ball information. The prize ball information includes, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, information on the difference between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of daily prize balls paid out in the past few days. Information, difference information (daily) between the number of prize balls paid out in the past few days and the number of prize balls fired.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not "prize ball information" (NO in step S3004), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "setting change / confirmation history". Determine (step S3006). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "setting change / confirmation history" (YES in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007). In this setting change / confirmation history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) described later in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the operator confirms the setting. It is possible to check the history, change history and browsing history.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 is operated and the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the sub CPU 201 sets the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) is displayed, and the operator displays the change history of the setting (setting value), the confirmation history of the setting (setting value), the browsing history, and the confirmed setting (setting value). And it is possible to check the changed settings (set values). The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "setting change / confirmation history" (NO in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "error information history". Determine (step S3008). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "error information history" (YES in step S3008), the sub CPU 201 performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 58) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check or change the error information history. do.

The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as an error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective when an abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. ) May not be able to receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to) is started.

As shown in FIG. 58, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a release date and time column in which the date and time when the error is cleared is displayed. In addition, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up / down / left / right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and the determination can be made by operating the main button 662. It is shown that it can be done.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "error information history" (NO in step S3008), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "monitoring history" (NO in step S3008). Step S3010). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "monitoring history" (YES in step S3010), the sub CPU 201 performs monitoring history processing (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "monitoring history" (NO in step S3010), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "warning display setting" (NO in step S3010). Step S3012). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "warning display setting" (YES in step S3012), the sub CPU 201 performs the warning display setting process (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the warning display setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "warning display setting" (NO in step S3012), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "notification setting" (NO in step S3012). Step S3014). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "notification setting" (YES in step S3014), the sub CPU 201 performs the notification setting process (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "notification setting" (NO in step S3014), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is in the "power saving mode" (NO in step S3014). Step S3016). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is in the "power saving mode" (YES in step S3016), the sub CPU 201 performs the power saving mode processing (step S3017). In this power saving mode processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the power saving mode setting. ..

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not in the "power saving mode" (NO in step S3016), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "maintenance" (step). S3018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance processing (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "confirmation of accessory operation" (NO in step S3018). Step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "accessory operation confirmation" (YES in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 performs the accessory operation confirmation process (step S3021). In this accessory operation confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the operation of the accessory.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "confirmation of accessory operation" (NO in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "liquid crystal brightness setting". (Step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "liquid crystal brightness setting" (YES in step S3022), the sub CPU 201 performs the liquid crystal brightness setting process (step S3023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. And.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "liquid crystal brightness setting" (NO in step S3022), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "volume adjustment setting". (Step S3024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S3024), the sub CPU 201 performs the volume adjustment setting process (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 24. And.

After processing step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025, and the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "volume". If it is determined that the setting is not "adjustment setting" (NO in step S3024), the sub CPU 201 ends the hall menu process and returns the process to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 50).

[11. Modes of various devices when changing settings / checking settings, etc.]
The modes of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change / setting confirmation are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. explain.

First, the time of changing the setting will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are not turned on unless the power is turned on. 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has been controlled (the setting change state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204 and the characters such as "setting is being changed". Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" from the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205, and lights the LED 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, the set value has not been finalized yet at this stage. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Further, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the hall menu screen is displayed, and characters such as "setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a voice such as "setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is only stored in the register until it is confirmed and is not stored in the main RAM 103. However, even if the set value is not confirmed, the updated set value is stored. It may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the set value is updated by operating another operating means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do so.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, unless the execution of the game is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received), the sub CPU 201 uses the display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In addition to displaying the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by 204, the characters such as "setting has been changed" are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized." From the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the LED. The control circuit 206 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. Such display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red continue as long as some operation is performed on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. , It ends when the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, it was decided that the backup clear process was not displayed, but the sub CPU 201 added the display "RAM has been cleared" in addition to the display "The settings have been changed". You may try to do it.

In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, the character display such as "The setting has been changed", the audio output such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized.", And the entire red color of the LED 25 By lighting for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen etc. by an unauthorized third party. Become. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the end of the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above is an aspect of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change.

Next, the time of confirming the settings will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are not turned on unless the power is turned on. 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and sets operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has been controlled (the setting confirmation state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204, and says "setting is being confirmed". Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "setting is being confirmed" from the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205, and lights the LED 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal plate 323. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power failure recovery command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has ended based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the game can be executed. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display process (step S316) based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the sub CPU 201 fully lights the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and ends all the red lighting of the LED 25 when the execution of the game is started. The performance display monitor 334 displays the base value by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, by performing all the red lighting of the LED 25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen or the like is authorized. It is possible to suppress what is done by a third party who does not have. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in the game stopped state when it is determined that no command is received from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the sub CPU 201 was started. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 204 and the voice control circuit 205 output a display and a voice saying "Please determine the set value", and the LED control circuit 206 outputs the LED 25 (for example, FIG. 1) is all white blinking. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above is an aspect of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[12. Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hall menu processing (see step S303 in FIG. 50) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the setting change / confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 with the setting change history, the setting value confirmation history, and the setting change / confirmation browsing history. It is displayed as a general term for "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information"). In the following, before explaining the setting change / confirmation history processing, first, the setting change, the setting confirmation, and the browsing will be described.

In the present embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, for example, by pressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of "1" to "6", and when the desired setting value is reached, the setting key switch signal is output. When the operation is turned off, one of the plurality of set values to be used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process is completed.

In order to make it possible to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes an initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed after executing the setting change processing, and sets value information after the change. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed), the setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, Then, the date and time data currently timed by the RTC209, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 3" and "No. 4" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, which will be described later. do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when confirming the set value, it is necessary for the main CPU 101 to execute the setting confirmation process as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated so as to be OFF, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned on again. As you did.

Further, in order to be able to display the setting confirmation history, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed after executing the setting confirmation process. do. At this time, although the set value has not been changed, the set value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S317 and step S318, see FIG. 56). Is preferable.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed) and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209 That is, the date and time data when the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the “No. 1” column in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, which will be described later. As shown in the "No. 1" column on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, the setting value information is associated with the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed and the time information. May also be displayed.

The work RAM 203 according to the present embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operator or when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of, for example, setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

In the present embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53), and the work RAM 203 is reached. It means that the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) showing the stored setting change / confirmation history information is displayed.

In order to be able to display the browsing history (browsing history), the sub CPU 201 executes the following processing. That is, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S301). Then, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 highlights the "setting change / confirmation history" (see FIG. 53). ). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203, and displays the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) on the liquid crystal display. In addition to displaying in the display area of the display device 16, operation type information (information indicating that browsing has been performed) and date and time data currently clocked by RTC209, that is, when browsing (information indicating that browsing has been performed) The date and time data (when the main button 662 is pressed) is associated with the date and time data and stored in the work RAM 203. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-mentioned history recording process (step S306, step S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the work RAM 203 when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress. When the browsing history is stored in the work RAM 203, the sub CPU 201 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change / confirmation history information and stores the browsing history in the work RAM 203. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 2" and "No. 5" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, which will be described later.

Here, the history recording processing of step S306 and step S307 can be summarized as follows. First, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The sub CPU 201 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At that time, the sub CPU 201 performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the settings. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 sets the sub CPU 201. Of the setting change history and browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, but only the setting change history is performed. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command, the sub CPU 201 , Of the setting confirmation history and browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, but only the setting confirmation history is performed. Therefore, in the history recording process of step S306 and step S307, "setting change / confirmation" is performed in the hall menu process (step S303) regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command. When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

In addition to the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above. When the step S303) is executed, the above-mentioned browsing record is performed, so that the fraudulent monitoring of the amusement store clerk is also performed. That is, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key that has a notch only in the corresponding part of the setting key 328 and is managed by the game machine management manager) is required, and this dedicated key is used. For example, a general clerk who does not have a key cannot browse, but a general clerk or an unauthorized player who does not have a dedicated key can browse the backup clear process without changing the settings. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, by making it possible for the sub CPU 201 to record browsing even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed, the security camera corresponding to that time (the security camera normally installed in the store). It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the video such as.

In the history recording process in steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the sub CPU 201 selects and determines "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command, Both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are performed, but the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is initialized. When it is a command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from being unnecessarily increased and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but the setting confirmation history can be used. Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it is browsed, and when the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is recorded if it is browsed (at least the setting value information is browsed). I tried to record it. This is because it is considered that the person who commits fraud is mainly browsing after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. That is, in the same time zone, if there is no browsing history and only the setting confirmation history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if the number of times of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large, it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud. .. Regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (step). YES in S3006), the setting confirmation process is performed when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by recording both the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. When the operation type information indicates that the command has been executed, the browsing history may also be displayed, and when the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

Further, the history recording process of step S306 and step S307 was browsed a plurality of times from the start of the hall menu display process of step S302 to the execution of the game screen return display process of step S315. Even so, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53) (YES in step S3046), the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) is displayed. However, if you select and confirm "Back" on this setting change / confirmation history screen, you will return to the hall menu screen again. Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and decided on this hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed a plurality of times between steps S302 and S315, the browsing record is only once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the browsing record performed between steps S302 to S315 to one time is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes settings, confirms settings, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase browsing records to increase the number of histories and make it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an act is performed, even if the setting change, setting confirmation, or browsing is performed a plurality of times during the steps S301 to S312, these histories are recorded only once and the power supply is supplied. It is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily by preventing the history from being recorded unless the is turned off and then re-entered.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hall menu redisplay process (step S310) is executed after the setting change process is completed, and the hall menu redisplay process is not executed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The screen return process (step S315) is executed. For example, even after the setting key 328 is turned off to complete the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hall menu is displayed. If the specifications are such that the screen is displayed, the hall menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, each time the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and decided on the hall menu screen displayed again, or the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328 is repeatedly executed, the user browses the screen. Even if there is, it is preferable to record the browsing once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has operating means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330. ing. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. Regarding the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine administrator.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) in which the setting value can be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting value is not displayed. -The confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 66 described later) may be stored as a browsing history.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59, 60, and 61 to 65, the liquid crystal display device 16 of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 and the setting change / confirmation history process are executed. The explanation will be given in comparison with the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 60 is an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 59. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen (a screen when the screen is changed to the setting change / confirmation history screen) of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example when "Clear" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

When "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 57) (YES in step S3006 of FIG. 57), the sub CPU 201 performs the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. "Back" is highlighted on the initial screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen.

The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 includes a setting change / confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, and a first selection area 1660a. It has a second selection region 1660b. In FIG. 61, an example is shown in which "Page" is displayed in the first selection area 1660a and "Clear" and "Return" are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are associated with each other and displayed in a list in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640. In the date and time column, the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, or the browsing was performed is displayed. In the operation type column, the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed. In the setting value column, when the setting is changed, the changed setting value is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and "confirmation" is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. .. Further, when the operation type is a setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

The sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history screen display procedure (step S3051), and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3052). This timekeeping process is a process of starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Here, the timer is started to be timed after the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (FIG. 61). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after (see, for example) is displayed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3053 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3053), the process proceeds to step S3071 described later, and it is determined whether or not "return" is determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, it is determined to be "Back". Will be done.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054). For example, when the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which "Back" is highlighted, the highlight display moves from "Back" to "Page" (see FIG. 61). (See FIG. 62).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3055). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3052 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3056 whether or not it has been determined to be "Page". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Page" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 changes to "Page". It is determined that "Page" has been determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that it has been determined to be "Page" (YES in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update screen display process (step S3057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the page update screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen, images imitating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, and "next page" and "previous page" are displayed on the left and right of the notation of "Page". As a result, the operator understands that the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page when the left select button 664c is operated, and the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the next page when the lower select button 664d is operated. can do. If the left select button 664c is operated while the first page of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, the final page is displayed, and if the right select button 664d is operated while the final page is displayed, one page is displayed. Convenience can be enhanced by cyclically displaying the eyes so that they are displayed.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "Page" (NO in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3065 described later, and determines whether or not it is determined to be "Clear" on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the page update screen display process (step 3057), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S3058). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3055 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timer is cleared and the time is restarted after the page update screen display process (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed). ), The hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3059 whether or not the page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process proceeds to step S3062 described later.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process (step S3060). When the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 indicates that the page update process has been performed. The determination is made, and the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated and displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page. The setting change / confirmation history screen when the setting change / confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is omitted.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 has a page when the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Although the update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up and down select buttons 664a and 664b, one of "No. 1" to "No. 5" in the setting change / confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated. Moreover, the page update process may be performed when it is determined that the line is the last line. The same applies to the page update process in the modified example of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process (step 3060), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S3061). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3058 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timer is cleared and restarted for a predetermined time (after the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed) after the page update process (step S3060) is executed. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within (for example, 30 seconds).

After executing the timekeeping process of step S3061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3059 and determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3062 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3062), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, moving to step S3072 instead of step S3071 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Because it is not.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 63), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “Clear” (see FIG. 64).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3064). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3061 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is that no processing was performed within the specified time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is sometimes displayed.

After executing the timekeeping process of step S3064, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3065 and determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 is set to " It is determined that "Clear" has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3065), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066). This setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are deleted (see FIG. 65). When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process in step S3065 is executed, the item "Return" is highlighted.

In the above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203 are deleted, but not necessarily all the data. It is not limited to erasing the data, and only a part of the data may be erased. As a mode for erasing a part of the data, for example, No. 64 in FIG. 1-No. A mode in which the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5 are deleted, a mode in which the setting change / confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, and a plurality of operation types (setting change). , Setting confirmation, browsing), out of the mode of deleting the date and time (time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, and the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information. A mode in which only specific information (for example, set value information) is deleted can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without entering the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed only when the correct password is entered. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent accidentally clearing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data. Further, for example, a person who performs a setting change process or browsing for the purpose of fraud may delete the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data in order to hide his / her fraud. Therefore, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S3067). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3064 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timer is cleared and the time is restarted after the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066) is executed (each history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all are erased.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3068 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3068), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, the reason for moving to step S3071 instead of step S3072 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, unless the select button 664 is operated. .. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3070). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3067 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3071 whether or not it is determined to "return". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 is set to " It is determined that "return" has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3073), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. This hall menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.

If it is not determined to "return" in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3073, ends the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and exits the hall menu. The initial screen (see FIG. 52) is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not select and decide the "return" item, if the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the setting change / confirmation history screen is finished and the initial screen of the hall menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing after step S3053.

In this way, on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without any operation being performed. However, it is configured so that the hall menu screen is displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, the sub CPU 201 controls the display of the hall menu screen to continue without ending as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed even if there is no operation. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

The process of moving to step S3073 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072) is the hall menu process (that is, the setting is being changed or is being changed) in step S303 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) described above. It is a process in (setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S311 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process of step S311 (a predetermined time elapses in step S3072 in the hall menu process of step S311) (step S3072). When it is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S315 (see FIGS. 50 and 56), ends the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen display process (step S315). The menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again. You will not be able to.

Further, regarding the process of returning to step S3053 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S3072), the hall menu process (that is, setting) of step S303 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) described above is also performed. It is a process during the change (during change or setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S311 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) (not shown). Specifically, even if the non-operation period does not reach the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process in step S311 (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. The game screen return process (step S315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) are executed based on the fact that a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that the command has been received is satisfied. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again even if the non-operation time does not reach the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the above-mentioned predetermined end condition Unless is satisfied, the processes of steps S3053 to S3072 are repeatedly executed.

In this way, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator has a grace period for viewing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and the predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds), the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends and the game screen return process (step S315) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S316) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a game machine administrator) cannot easily browse confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, and it is possible to ensure security.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value are set regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing). A list screen showing all the information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is changed is displayed, and the time information and the set value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. The second information (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 61) and the third information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) in which the time information and the set value information at the time of browsing are displayed are displayed. 2, No. 5) and are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, the game machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to display the specific operation type information. Therefore, a screen in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list (see, for example, FIG. 61), the above-mentioned first information, the above-mentioned second information, and the above-mentioned third information Of these, the narrowed-down screen narrowed down to only specific information may be selectively displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is highly convenient in terms of business because it is possible to know not only fraudulent detection but also information such as how many days the business has been conducted with the set value. Since the above narrowing screen can be displayed by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information unrelated to the operation type (for example, current time information) may be displayed.

[13. Other examples of display screens displayed in setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. However, the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 is the same as that in FIGS. 59 and 60. Therefore, in another example, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described and the sub. The description of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the CPU 201 will be omitted.

FIG. 66 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. FIG. 67 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the set value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 69 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 70 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the confirmation setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, but the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed. In addition, the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed is displayed in the date / time column where the time information is displayed, and the operation type (setting change, setting change,) is displayed in the operation type column where the operation type information is displayed. Setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed.

Further, on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, in addition to "clear" and "return", "setting display" is also displayed in the second selection area 1690b. In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, "Back" is selected and displayed (highlighted). Also in this other example, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the select button 664.

When the select button 664 is operated to select "setting display", "setting display" is highlighted (see FIG. 67). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "setting display" is selected (highlighted display), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information is displayed. Instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen that is not displayed, the setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen) in which the time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list is displayed (see FIG. 68). ). In this way, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and deciding "Setting display", it is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The new set values will be displayed in a list. When the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. Back is highlighted.

On the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 68) in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, when "Page" is selected by operating the select button 664, "Page" is highlighted. (See FIG. 69). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process. When this page update process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 70) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this page update screen, the next page or the previous page can be updated by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d.

In addition, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 66) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. However, the page update process is executed by the sub CPU 201. However, when this page update process is executed, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the setting value information is not displayed. The page update screen on the setting change / confirmation history screen. Is displayed. On this page update screen, by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed.

In this other example, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen, and as shown in FIG. 68, the time information and the operation type information are displayed. And the screen in which the set value information is displayed in a list can be selectively displayed, but the screen of FIG. 66 is one or two of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

In addition, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by those who meet specific conditions (for example, those who have entered an appropriate password). However, this will be described later.

FIG. 71 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set values can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until it is done. As shown in FIG. 71, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a hall menu when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed as a first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, but the setting is not limited to this. It may be an operation performed when executing at least one of the change process and the setting confirmation process. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 53) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third step, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 53) displayed in the second step. When pressed, the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this setting change / confirmation history screen, date and time data, an operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and a set value are associated with each other.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to third steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of the setting change, viewing of the setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation button group 66 such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and control related to the game. The main CPU 101 is a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the sub CPU 201 is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332, which is a setting means for enabling the above, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain the written information even in a state, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 sets the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 in the work RAM 203 when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation. It has a setting display function that stores change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change / setting confirmation and date / time data stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the setting change / setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed. In this state, when the main button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, the main button is displayed with the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data displayed. When the 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may acquire the date and time data for which the set value is received from the RTC209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent activities such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and viewed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. A main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 are provided, and the control unit is a setting that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, which is a means, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201 are provided, and the display control unit includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and even in a non-energized state. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from RTC209 as the setting change / confirmation history information, and works. It has a setting display function that displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the date and time The data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history in association with each other. It may be configured to be used.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and displayed on the liquid crystal display. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[14. Maintenance process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the maintenance process (step S3019) executed by the sub CPU 201 and the maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed are displayed. I will explain while comparing. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the maintenance process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 74 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 201 displays the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this maintenance process, for example, devices connected to the sub CPU 201 (for example, various sensors, various operating accessories, etc.) such as the effect button switch 621, the upper accessory 1000, and the like are targeted for the maintenance process. It is possible to have the operator confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation status display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the substantially center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74). In this operation status display table, for example, a name string in which the names of 28 various devices are displayed and a number string in which serial numbers (1 to 28) attached to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. And an operating state sequence indicating the operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operating status column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is input from various devices, the display of the operating status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, if the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is being displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the effect button 1 from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above-mentioned "input from each device" is based on the detection of an input port or the like by the sub CPU 201. In addition, each of the effectors has a sensor that detects that it exists at least in the normal position (standby position), and when the sensor that detects the normal position is ON, the display is turned off and the sensor that detects the normal position is It is assumed that the display is turned on when it is OFF, that is, when the effecting object moves.

Further, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hall menu screen is returned (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 74, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 72), the sub CPU 201 first acquires the sub device input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is the detection result of the operating state of various devices with serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. 74. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state with an input or an off state with no input.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub input state information editing process for reading the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (step S3082).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a maintenance screen display process for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub input state information read in step S3082 (step S3083). ). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen and the update of the display (for example, the change from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display) are performed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (step S3084). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (YES in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 57), and performs the process. Return to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S3081.

By the way, some pachinko machines and pachislot machines in recent years have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect button 62 is provided with a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting and moving upward based on the lottery result of a special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 executes maintenance for the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "effect button 2" having the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 projects and moves the effect button 62 upward to perform maintenance on the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is a normal determination, the sub CPU 201 executes the maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes the maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display). When the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the "main button 2" is determined to be normal, for example, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. 74. When this is done, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time and the maintenance mode ends, the sub CPU 201 controls to return to the normal state (the state before protruding upward). NS.

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines, some pachinko machines and pachislot machines are provided with a plurality of effecting objects having different driving means. In such a gaming machine, a plurality of producing objects having different driving means are simultaneously operated. Maintenance may be executed, a plurality of effectors having different driving means may be operated at different timings to perform maintenance, or they may be independently operated to perform maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a production accessory 1 to a production accessory 3 having different driving means, for example, when the "directing accessory 1 + 2" of the serial number 14 shown in FIG. Maintenance is performed by simultaneously operating the object 1 and the effect object 2. Further, for example, when the serial number 17 “effect 1 → 2” shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 first operates the effect 1 and then operates the effect 2. Perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing accessory 1” having the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 operates the producing accessory 1 independently to perform maintenance. In addition, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable. For example, the "effect 1 + 3" of the serial number 15 in FIG. (The operation of the main button 662 is not enabled). In FIG. 74, the serial number 15 “directing accessory 1 + 3” is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 are operated at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, the effect 1 is first operated and then the effect 1 is operated). If it does not interfere with the effect (when operating the effect 3), for example, it is preferable to enable selection and determination of “effect 1 → 3” of serial number 18 shown in FIG. 74. In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of production objects in a plurality of manners, to operate them at different timings, or to operate them independently, and at the same time when they interfere with each other when they are operated at the same time. By making it inoperable, it is possible to improve maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of troubles.

Although not shown in FIG. 74, a game ball or medal payout sensor, a payout collateral ball sensor, a lending button (also called a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachislot settlement button, and the like are enclosed. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables games by circulating the game balls, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game balls is also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201 have been described as targets for maintenance processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the devices connected to the main CPU 101 are not limited to this. (For example, the power switch 35, the first start port switch 421, the second start port switch 441, etc.) may be subject to maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, it is simulated between the ball lending machine and the pachinko game machine (in the case of CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button and the return button of the CR card. Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from "OFF" display to "ON" display).

[15. Mobile terminal cooperation function]
Next, the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77.

The mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a function of linking the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko gaming machine 1, detailed information about the game played by the player can be recorded, and the function that does not affect the gaming result of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be customized by satisfying predetermined conditions. Can be done.

Predetermined conditions include, for example, that the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and that a specific effect is executed. Further, as a function of customizing a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high probability game state may be changed to a special song, or a liquid crystal display device may be used. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed in 16.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, the guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. If, for example, a pressing operation is performed on the main button 662 while the decorative symbol displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not variablely displayed, the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)", the characters "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 75, the items of the guide menu include "start uni-memo", "big hit symbol / number of rounds", "model site", and "return to game". In the initial guide image, "Start Unimemo" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of guide menus can be selected by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 75, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "Start Unimemo" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When "big hit symbol / number of rounds" is selected, the jackpot symbol / number of rounds is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). Then, when the "model site" is selected, the model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an image for effect displayed when playing a game, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or any of the first start port 420 and the second start port 440 is used. Also, the demo video that is displayed when the prize is not won for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 still displays a video for directing to be displayed when playing a game and the above demo video. Is displayed.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the initial image of Unimemo, the characters "Unimemo", the characters "Customize your favorite character", and the Unimemo menu are displayed. The items of the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to the game", and "return". In the initial image of Unimemo, "Enter password" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of Unimemo menus can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 76, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “password input” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when "password input" is selected and determined, the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 77).

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The password display image includes the characters "Enter password" and a password entry menu.

In the password input menu, a plurality of password input menu items are displayed. The items of the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated, the item is selected. , Determined by the highlighted number or alphabet. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "Enter" is selected and determined from the password input menu, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected from the password input menu, the characters are deleted from the password display image one by one from the last input character.

When "Return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 may display an image for production when the game is played, or the firing handle 32 may not be operated for a predetermined period of time. A demo image displayed when a prize is not won for a predetermined period is displayed in either the 1 start port 420 or the 2nd start port 440. When "Back" is selected from the password input menu, the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

[16. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Hereinafter, modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described.
[16-1. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 1]
First, a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83.

The setting change / confirmation history processing in the first modification is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, except that it has an authentication function for viewing the setting value. .. In the following, the points different from the setting change / confirmation history processing described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 59) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 1, when the time counting process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in, the description of the timekeeping process will be omitted in the following description.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this setting change / confirmation history process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 57. It is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change / confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication process will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, for example. Further display the password request screen (step S3101). FIG. 80 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 81 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

In this modification 1, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed, and the password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request may be performed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the sub CPU 201 executes the password input process (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the entered password is correct, and if the entered password is correct (YES in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, the screen shown in FIG. 82, for example, is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Here, FIG. 82 shows an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the entered password is inappropriate in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication process of step S3100 and determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is correct (YES in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S3110), and then steps. Move to S3120. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the entered password is appropriate when, for example, the main button 662 is pressed after the password is entered on the password request screen. If the entered password is inappropriate or the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the authentication NG process in step S3103 described above is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed. Can be done. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

In step S3120, the sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process. At this time, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) is displayed in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the set value are shown in association with each other.

After the setting change / confirmation history screen display process in step S3120, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3130). When it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3130), the page update process is executed (step S3140), and then the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process proceeds to step S3150.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" in step S3150. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 64) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it has been determined to be "clear".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3150), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3160), and proceeds to step S3180. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are deleted (see, for example, FIG. 65). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3150), the process proceeds to step S3170.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to "return" in step S3170. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is determined to "return".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3170), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3180), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130 and the process of shifting to step S3130 is continued.

FIG. 83 shows a setting change / confirmation in which the set value can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 83, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 53) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the password (see FIGS. 80 and 81), and determines the suitability of the input password.

As a fourth step, if the password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 68) in which the corresponding operation type) and the set value are associated with each other is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to fourth steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of the setting change, viewing of the setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation button group 66 such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and control related to the game. The main CPU 101 is a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the sub CPU 201 is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332, which is a setting means for enabling the above, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain the written information even in a state, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 sets the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 in the work RAM 203 when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation. It has a setting display function that stores change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change / setting confirmation and date / time data stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the setting change / setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed. In this state, when the main button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, the main button is displayed with the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data displayed. When the 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may acquire the date and time data for which the set value is received from the RTC209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent activities such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and viewed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. A main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 are provided, and the control unit is a setting that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, which is a means, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201 are provided, and the display control unit includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and even in a non-energized state. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from RTC209 as the setting change / confirmation history information, and works. It has a setting display function that displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the date and time The data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history in association with each other. It may be configured to be used.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and displayed on the liquid crystal display. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[16-2. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 2]
Next, a modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88.

The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “loud”. , "Medium", and "Small" to switch to one of the three volume positions, and to switch to multiple volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is set in advance. When the order is matched, the user is authenticated as a user with administrator privileges. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning the jog dial and the volume may be fixed by pressing the jog dial.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing has an authentication processing function for performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the change order of the volume position. In the second modification, for example, a control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the voice control circuit 204, and the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a volume switch 108 that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process (see FIG. 85) in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The volume switch 108 is arranged in, for example, the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and a slide operation for setting an initial setting value is possible. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "large". In addition to the switching operation, the switching operation is sequentially performed to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of "large"-> "medium"-> "small"-> "medium". That is, the sub CPU 201 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user having administrator authority (administrative authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. Operate with a pattern and store the multiple volume positions and operation order in the memory. Then, when the administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set value, the volume switch 108 is operated with a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set value.

The authentication operation pattern includes, for example, an operation pattern representing a position change from the volume position 2 (volume “medium”) in FIG. 84 to the volume position 1 (volume “low”), or a volume position 2 to the volume position 3 (volume position 3 (volume “low”). It is possible to hold in advance an operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to the volume “loud”).

As a result, the sub CPU 201 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and the administrator determines whether or not the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern. It can be determined whether or not.

As described above, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this authentication process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 52) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 57 (YES in step S3006), and "setting change / confirmation" is displayed on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 while the "history" is highlighted (see FIG. 53).

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs a volume password request display process (step S3201) for displaying a screen prompting the input of the volume password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed. Run.

FIG. 86 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 87 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, in the volume password request display process in step S3201 of FIG. 85, the sub CPU 201 enters the password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, by operating the volume switch. A message such as "The setting value will be displayed after entering the password." Is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information.

In this modification 2, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed, and the volume password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the operation pattern (step S3202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts the operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and collates it with the preset authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed depending on whether or not the two match (step S3203). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 executes the processes after step S3120 in FIG. 78.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 that the authentication is NG. (Step S3204). As a result, the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of step S3110 in FIG. 78. In the above authentication NG display process, a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In FIG. 84, an example in which a volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be any of at least three or more. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information detected by this position detection function (volume position information is acquired, and the acquired order and the work RAM 203 are stored in advance. The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed on condition that the operation sequence is matched with the stored predetermined operation order.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, a hole is formed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 53) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the volume password (see FIGS. 86 and 87), captures the input volume password, and determines the suitability of the captured volume password. The suitability of the volume password is determined by collating the captured volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when both match and authentication is OK, the volume password is considered to be appropriate. to decide.

As a fourth step, if the volume password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 68) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, and at least a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving operations of the player. A non-game operation unit that the player does not operate, a main CPU 101 that controls the game, and a sub CPU 201 that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16 are provided. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6) and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. By means, the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 sends the setting change or setting confirmation to the work RAM 203 when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or setting confirmation. The non-game operation unit is equipped with a setting display function that stores the set value and the date and time data from the RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16. It has a configuration for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the operations are performed in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or you will be able to determine whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and stored in the liquid crystal display device 16. The browsing history may be displayed.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, it is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to the authorized person, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. This operation order is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 can detect each volume position of the operation switch. The setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the condition is that the order of the acquired volume position information matches the predetermined operation order stored in advance. In addition, the configuration may be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance to identify the authorized one. It is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to an authorized person without adding an operation switch.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of determining whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only those who have the authority regarding the set value in the hall can display the setting change / confirmation history information. Although the configuration has been described, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information as in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below, from the input unit in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be configured to authenticate using the entered password.

[16-3. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 3]
Next, a modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game system 210 according to the third modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The gaming system 210 includes a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged in the network 230. As will be described later, the gaming system 210 cooperates with the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 to perform an authentication process related to confirmation of setting change / confirmation history information.

In the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. It has a function of displaying the code in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 92). Specifically, the setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is information content such as displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, and includes the setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generation means for generating the two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 222 has the functions of the display unit and the operation unit, and is composed of a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a (registered trademark) and the like (see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display operation unit 222 and the camera unit constitute the operation display unit and the imaging means in the present invention, respectively.

The control unit 221 has a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like, and the CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in, for example, a storage device or a RAM. I do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL, and inputs the password to the operation display unit 222 (the figure to be described later). Input screen display control unit that displays (see 95), an authentication result acquisition unit that sends the input password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the above URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240. It has a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a manner including the set value when the acquired authentication result is correct. The extraction unit, display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application installed in advance in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the constituent elements of the control unit 221 according to the present invention, are the extraction means, the input screen display control means, and the authentication result, respectively, in the present invention. The acquisition means and the history information display control means are configured.

The server device 240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for an authentication service identified by the above URL, receives an input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 that has accessed the above URL, and has a preset password. It is equipped with an authentication service function that determines whether or not the password is correct and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constituting the gaming system 210 according to the modified example 3. This setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by "changing settings" from among a plurality of hall menu items displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 51) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. -The confirmation history is selected and determined, and the operation is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted (see, for example, FIG. 53) on the hall menu screen.

In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 59) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 3, when the time counting process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the above, the description of the timekeeping process is omitted in the description in the third modification.

When this setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site of the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 161a (see FIG. 92) is performed (step S3301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a two-dimensional code display process of displaying the setting change / confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A in the manner shown in FIG. 92, for example. Execute (step S3302).

After executing the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 can accept a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to. The main button 662 is a button for making a processing return request. The select button 664 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Further, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the sub CPU 201 performs the processes of steps S3303 to S3305. In FIG. 90, the processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 59 are omitted, but in order to perform these processes, it is necessary to perform these processes between steps S3302 and S3303 in FIG. 90. The processing of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in is added.

In FIG. 90, after the two-dimensional code display process of step S3302, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear” in step S3303. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. , The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been determined to be "clear".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3303), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is deleted (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3303), the process proceeds to step S3305.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to "return" in step S3305. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is determined to "return".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3305), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3306), and the setting change / confirmation history process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S3305), the process proceeds to step S3303 and the processing after step S3303 is continued.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3303), the sub CPU 201 displays the setting change / confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 92). You may try to clear it. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change / confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This process is started on condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing and displays the image data on the display operation unit 222 based on the image data, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 222a is performed (step S3401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores the two-dimensional code in the RAM, for example, in a predetermined storage area. The two-dimensional code acquisition process for holding the information is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 95), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (step S3403).

After executing the password input display process in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 cooperates with the server device 240 and performs the password authentication process through the following steps S3404 and S3405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors whether or not a password has been entered in the password display field 222c (see FIG. 95) (step S3404), and from the ten-key 222b. Performs the process of accepting the input of the password of. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), the control unit 221 transmits the input password to the server device 240.

The server device 240 collates the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 with the registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or NG depending on whether or not the two match. The server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the above determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 returns only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 transmits the input password received in step S3404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S3405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S3405), the control unit 221 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying a message or the like indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 222 (NO). Step S3410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is correct (YES in step S3405), the control unit 221 is set to display the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in step S3402 on the display operation unit 222. The change / confirmation history display process is performed (step S3406). In this setting change / confirmation history display process, the control unit 221 embeds (arranges) the setting change / confirmation history information held in step S3402 according to a preset display format for display information. It is created, and based on this display information, the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display operation unit 222 (see FIG. 96).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to the modified example 3.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the sub CPU 201 has set change / confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) of FIG. And the setting change / confirmation history screen including the two-dimensional code 161a are displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen 116g includes the setting change / confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. Includes.

When displaying the two-dimensional code 161a in the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 90) in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 puts the two-dimensional code in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A, for example, "* The two-dimensional code is displayed on the mobile terminal. It may be configured to display a message prompting the transition to the authentication service, such as "Please read and access the authentication service."

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the modification 3. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of this embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 94 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code reading and display processing of S1101.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. In the password input display process (see FIG. 91) in step S3403, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 95 on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 95, on the password input screen, a numeric keypad 222b having keys "0" to "9", "*", and "#", and a password display field 222c for displaying the password entered by the numeric keypad 222b. , The message field 222d is displayed. In the message field 222d, a message prompting the password to be entered is displayed, for example, "* Please enter the password. The set value will be displayed after the password is entered." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 95, the password converted into the hidden character “*” can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password is input by operating the numeric keypad 2222b.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. As shown in FIG. 96, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g displays the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in S1102, for example, equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 133. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 96, the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the above-mentioned display format, the above-mentioned display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 96, the scrolling of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supports. As a result, the control unit 221 determines that the setting change / confirmation history display process in S11 07 is performed during the setting change / confirmation history process in FIG. 91, and then the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display operation unit 222 together with the setting change / confirmation history information. The state shifts to an acceptable state in which a page update request based on the operation of the button 222e and the select button 222f can be accepted.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3407). To determine whether or not the page update operation has been performed, when it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407), and the page is determined. The update process is executed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the page refresh operation is performed (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the last line is reached), scrolling of the page is continued. Page update processing is performed (step S3408).

When the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, when the operation of the select button 222f is stopped and the decision button 222e is not pressed, the process proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in step S3409 that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071), the control unit 222 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" is not determined (NO in step S3409), the control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A side converts the setting change / confirmation history information into a two-dimensional code as the so-called raw data and displays it in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A ( (See step S3301 and step S3302 in FIG. 90), the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed on the portable wireless communication terminal 220 side to generate setting change / confirmation history information. The process of returning to the data is being performed (see step S3401 and step S3402 in FIG. 91).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped as standard with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code.

Regarding this point, in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and the dedicated application makes it possible to display in the same display format as the pachinko gaming machine 1A side.

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it should be viewed in the same display format as the pachinko machine 1A side. It is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only an authorized person can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the set value, which is sufficient confidentiality. Can be secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, but the above data is as shown in FIG. 96 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Is displayed in. Therefore, if you do not have a dedicated application that has the display format, even if you read it with a general-purpose barcode reader, you will not be able to understand what kind of display the character string that reads the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be ensured. The application is distributed at the time of delivery of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and can be obtained only by an authorized person.

In the present embodiment, the password is authenticated by receiving the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and determining whether the password is correct or not depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 receives the password from the server device 240, and may determine that the entered password matches the password received from the server device 240 to determine whether the entered password is correct or not. If you want to further secure confidentiality, you can use the dedicated application to be installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 by encrypting the setting change / confirmation history information on the pachinko game machine 1A side, then generating and displaying a two-dimensional code. The configuration may be such that a setting change / confirmation history information decryption function corresponding to the above encryption is added.

Next, the procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 93.

As shown in FIG. 93, as the first procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A executes a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. The hall menu screen is displayed when this is done. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 53) (the set value is not displayed).

As the third procedure, the pachinko game machine 1A is mainly in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 53) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the work RAM 203 is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (see FIG. 92). ).

As a fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 94). After shooting the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and the password is entered from the password input screen (see FIG. 95) provided by the dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the game system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the game system 210 or each pachinko gaming machine 1A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 receives the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and collates it with the registered password to perform password authentication. Here, the server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 to that effect when the authentication is OK.

As a sixth step, when the authentication is OK in the fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth step on a screen in a predetermined display format (FIG. 96). (Refer to), the content including the set value is displayed on the display operation unit 222. As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1A according to the present embodiment controls the game with the liquid crystal display device 16A for displaying various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 which are operation units for receiving various operations. A main CPU 101, which is a control unit, and a sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16A, are provided, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332 and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit are provided. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the stored information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC209 as the setting change / confirmation history information, and the work RAM 203. It is equipped with a setting display function that displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the LCD display device 16A in the display area, and is an operation unit with the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data displayed by the setting display function. It has a configuration in which setting change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code when the main button 662 is operated.

With this configuration, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means as the setting change / confirmation history information, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. , The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the two-dimensional code is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the display is permitted after the password is authenticated, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 201 uses the displayed date / time data as a browsing history in the work RAM 203. The browsing history may be stored and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment has a mobile wireless communication based on information from a predetermined server device 240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. The terminal 220 may be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the password entered in step 2 matches. Therefore, since it is possible to authenticate with a password known only to an authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized one to the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. This password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, the game system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachinko game machine 1A and a server device 240 connected to the network 230 and managing a site for authentication, and the pachinko game machine 1A is a work. The server device 240 further has a generation function of generating the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 and the two-dimensional code of the site URL, and the server device 240 compares the password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 with the preset password. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has a display operation unit 222 having a display and operation function, and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. A camera unit that captures the displayed two-dimensional code, an extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change / confirmation history information and URL, and an input screen that displays a password input screen for entering a password. When the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit that sends the password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and the acquired authentication result are correct. The configuration includes a history information display control unit that displays setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the present embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and after authentication by the server device 240, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. Setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also to make an illegal operation. You will be able to judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1A and a gaming system 210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

The gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its action and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[17. Application example to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to pachislot machines. When the invention according to the present embodiment is applied to a pachislot machine, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In pachislot, the setting change process can be performed on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is off, and the set value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or it is detected that the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachislot has made the above-mentioned setting changes, input a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the setting key, and then operate the start lever. When the indicated signal is received, data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachislot machine constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting has been changed and RTC. The date and time data currently clocked by, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change confirmation history information. The pachislot sub CPU constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In pachislot, checking the set value means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and displaying the current set value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the setting confirmation process on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON in the power ON state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The pachislot setting switch constitutes a setting means that enables the change or confirmation of the set value together with the main CPU.

In order to be able to display the confirmation history of the set value, the main CPU confirms the set value by the above operation, and when the signal generated from the setting switch is input by the operation of the setting key, the set value is confirmed. And the setting confirmation command which is the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting confirmation) indicating that the set value has been confirmed, and The date and time data currently timed by the RTC, that is, the date and time data for receiving the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, is stored in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information. The work RAM 203 can store and hold the written information even in the non-energized state.

The sub CPU that has received the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. Then, when the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hall menu display process for displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachislot machine. The hall menu screen displayed on the pachislot machine is replaced with the "prize ball information" displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as "total medal information" being displayed, the screen is basically the same as the hall menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In pachislot, browsing means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. The setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed as, for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen on condition that the main button is pressed in this state.

The pachislot sub CPU executes the same processing as the processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, such as hall menu processing, setting change / confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. Can be done. Further, when the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to the pachislot machine, the hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are applied. , A screen similar to the screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, etc. is displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In pachislot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in pachislot, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the precursor games of "SBB" and "BB" are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Further, in pachislot, the first ART ("SBB", "BB", "RB") and the second ART are ended on the condition that the games of the number of staying games are exhausted, respectively, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, "100", and like "BB", the number of games added to the number of staying games in "SBB" is increased. It may be configured to be added (added).

Further, in pachislot, the number of games for producing additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" may be set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for which the additional additions A, B, and C are produced may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additions A, B, C).

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games in the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games such as "50", or instead, a predetermined number of games is set as one set (for example,). , 1 set "50" games), the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set "50" games, that is, a total of "100" games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided in which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. In addition, a lottery for the number of additional games may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the end of this predetermined period (when the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the irregular push is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachislot machine, as an accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a rotating accessory unit 122 having a rotating accessory 123 that is rotated by driving a stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving, for example, a stepping motor or a solenoid.

[18. Addendum]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[18-1. 1st to 8th gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or each game table.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, structural factors that influence the ball entry rate and the ball ejection tendency to the ball entrance port. Alternatively, the state of the control element can only be changed according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game interest is necessarily large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving the interest. be.

In order to solve the first problem, the first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-1. First game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) and
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variation display of a symbol (for example, special symbol) is performed in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time.
A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines a variation pattern performed in the display means based on the result of the lottery, and
A variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern, and
A symbol display control means (for example, a symbol display control means that displays a variation of the symbol (for example, a variation display of a special symbol) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means, and stops and displays the result of the lottery. For example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93 and
With
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
A fluctuation pattern table defined so that the probability that the fluctuation time is relatively determined to be a short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases (for example, FIG. It is characterized in that it stores the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol shown in 13.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the higher the set value, the larger the number of lottery times per unit time, and eventually the lottery result. Expectations will be raised, and it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of pachinko.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time is further provided, and the lottery is further provided.
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
Another variation pattern table defined so that the probability of being determined by the short variation pattern becomes higher than that of the variation pattern table as the set value set by the setting change control means increases (for example, FIG. 15). The fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more is further stored.
The fluctuation pattern determining means is
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a big hit lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the big hit game state ends), It is characterized in that the fluctuation pattern can be determined by using the other fluctuation pattern table.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using another fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the greater the number of lottery times per unit time, and when the number of times the lottery is executed is a specific number of times the lottery is executed, the player's expectation is raised, and it is possible to improve the game interest. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, when a jackpot lottery for a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the jackpot game state ends, but is not limited to this.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result.
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variation display of the symbol (for example, the variation display of the special symbol) is performed, the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. May be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbol, if it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability / unsuitability for the game information, It is configured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-2. Second game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) and
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed by a predetermined symbol and the result of the lottery can be shown depending on the stop mode of the symbol.
A stop mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be shown in the display means based on the result of the lottery.
A stop mode table storage means (for example, program ROM 202) that stores a stop mode table (for example, the decorative symbol determination table of FIG. 14) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determining means.
A symbol effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S207) that controls the symbol to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means.
When the symbol is displayed in an aspect (for example, a first aspect, a second aspect, a specific aspect) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of benefits advantageous to the player. (For example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot), and a profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 10).
With
The profit-giving means
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit) and the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of benefits Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) with a relatively high advantage.
The stop mode determining means
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the probability that the stop mode of the symbol will be stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the stopping mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the more the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among the plurality of benefits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The stop mode determining means
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the set value set by the setting change control means has the same probability that the specific profit is given regardless of the set value. It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the value increases.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, big hit), the setting is changed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means increases, the probability of being stopped in a specific stop mode increases, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means when the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. Even if it is determined by the stop mode determining means that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means (for example, the process of step S722) for controlling the game cannot proceed is executed. Main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is being performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if the result of the lottery is a specific result and it is determined that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, it is inappropriate in determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information. If it is determined that the game cannot proceed, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-3. Third game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118, including both a jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery).
A lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of FIG. 16 or FIG. 17 is a jackpot).
At least a display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) in which a variable display of a symbol is performed, and
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays a variation of the symbol and stops and displays the result of the lottery.
The symbol is in an aspect (for example, Special Figure 1-1 to Special Figure 1-8, Special Figure 2-1 to Special Figure 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, a profit-giving means (for example, FIG. 10) that grants one of a plurality of profits (for example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player. Main CPU 101) that executes jackpot game control, and
With
The lottery table storage means
A plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) having a relatively high advantage among the plurality of profits differ depending on the set value are stored.
The lottery means
It is characterized in that the lottery can be performed using the lottery table according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits having a relatively high advantage differ according to the set value, the lottery is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to make the degree of profit given to the player different according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The profit-giving means
As the specific profit, at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player and a high-probability gaming state in which the profit is given to the gaming state after the special gaming state ends with a relatively high probability are given. And
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables whose probabilities of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differ depending on the set value are stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The profit-giving means
As the specific profit, a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which the lottery is promoted is further given.
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables whose probabilities of being controlled to the specific gaming state differ depending on the set value are stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. Even if the result is the result of granting the specific profit, the game control means for controlling the game from proceeding (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) and
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (4) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery related to the variable display of the symbol is the result of giving a specific profit, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-4. Fourth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area, and
The main capable of executing the processing of the special lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83, step S118) in which the special lottery is performed in a different lottery mode based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into each of the plurality of start ports. CPU101) and
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit).
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game, and
With
The special lottery means
When the special lottery is performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start port, the probability that the specific result will be obtained depends on the set value set by the setting change control means. Can be done differently
The specific game execution means is
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the frequency is higher when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the specific game can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of a specific result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the first The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. That is, when a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value on the premise that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port" is the first. When a game ball enters the start port of, a winning judgment (including a probability of 0) is made for a specific result, but the probability that a specific result will be obtained in the winning judgment is that the game ball has entered the second starting port. It includes not only a mode lower than the case, but also a mode in which a winning judgment situation for a specific result is not performed when the game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 10).
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), the start variable control means (for example, the start variable control means) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start port. , Main CPU101) and
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (first start port 420), the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the game ball enters the second start port (first start port 440). A special symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that displays variation of the second special symbol based on the approach, and
A normal game in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF so long that the time for displaying the variation of the second special symbol (for example, an average time of 1000 sec) affects the progress of the game. The second gaming state (for example, the average time of 1 sec) is shorter than the time of the variation display of the first special symbol (for example, an average time of 10 sec). A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON and the time reduction flag is set to OFF).
Is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the second gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. , It is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the ordinary lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the appropriate determination means is unsuitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start port (for example, the second start port). If it is determined that, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the game cannot proceed without executing the specific game by the specific game executing means. (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, even if the game ball enters the starting port (for example, the second starting port), a special lottery (for example, for example) is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port. Before the result of the second special lottery) is shown (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even so, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, a small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-5. Fifth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A start port provided in the game area and
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, and
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit), and
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 10).
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), the start variable control means (for example, the start variable control means) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start port. , Main CPU101) and
Within a specific area where a specific opening is provided based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port is a specific result (for example, a small hit). A specific area variable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that the game ball can easily enter (for example, accept) the game ball.
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the acceptance of the game ball in the specific mouth provided in the specific area, and a second special game execution means.
With
The specific area variable control means
It is configured that the predetermined movable piece can be operated so that the ease of entering the game ball into the specific area may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set set value. The operating frequency of the movable piece is different, and as a result, the opportunity for which the privilege is given can be made different according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means
The ease of entering (for example, accepting) the game ball into the starting port is made different according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of normal hit is made different) of the normal symbol. By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is set. It is characterized in that it is performed so that it can be different depending on the situation.

According to the gaming machine (2), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is usually different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of benefits given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will differ depending on the set value set, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means
Ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area by making the probability of obtaining the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery different according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Is characterized in that is performed so as to be different depending on the set value set.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is usually different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area differs according to the set set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
If it is determined by the appropriate determination means that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start port. Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means (for example, the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without operating the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means. The main CPU 101) to be executed and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (4) above, even if the game ball enters the starting port, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is shown (for example, a special symbol). The suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined during the variable display of the game information. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result, it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate. Is configured so that the game cannot proceed before a predetermined movable piece is activated. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-6. 6th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) and
The special game state control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 10) that can be controlled to the special game state (for example, the big hit game state) is executed based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). Main CPU101) and
A game state control means (for example, in step S169) capable of controlling the game state after the special game state is ended to an advantageous game state (for example, a high probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The main CPU101), which advances the game after setting the flag,
A counting means (for example, main) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) that the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled by the normal game state after being controlled to the special game state. CPU101) and
With
The game state control means
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, the special gaming state can be controlled and the result can be controlled.
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the end of the special game state is controlled to the normal game state.
The specified number of times
It is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated up to a specified number of times, and this specified number of times differs depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
The specified number of times determination means
It is characterized in that the lottery for determining the specified number of times is performed so that the expected value for the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Since it differs depending on the game, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the counting means counts even if the number of times counted by the counting means is less than the specified number of times. A game control means for controlling the number of times counted by the player so that the game cannot proceed without reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated (that is, the number of loops) without being controlled by the normal gaming state has not reached the specified number of times (that is, during the loop). ), The suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without the number of loops reaching the specified number of times. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-7. 7th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
With a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440) (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118). ,
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). Main CPU 101) to execute and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of at least executing an opening effect performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state.
With
The lottery means
The higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the advantage of the lottery.
The effect control means
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed so that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be lengthened as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. It is characterized in that it is configured to do so.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the lottery is performed in a manner in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is set. Therefore, at a high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time while improving the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
With more
The lottery means
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special gaming state, a random number can be extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, and a random number can be extracted.
The appropriateness determination means
Even when the game is controlled to the special game state, it is configured so that the suitability / unsuitability of the game information can be determined.
The game control means
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game progress is not permitted to control the game so that it cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state. It is characterized by having means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even when the game is controlled to the special gaming state, the suitability / unsuitability of the gaming information may be determined. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so that security is ensured. At the same time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In order to solve the first problem, an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-8. Eighth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100) and a second entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110).
An approach permitting means (for example, a distribution device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances and exits.
Different benefits (for example, if the number of rounds is different and there is a starting port below the entrance, a lottery will be held) when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. A profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 10) capable of giving the player a profit-giving means (for example, whether or not it is executed) and
With
The entry allowance means
A feature of the first entrance and the second entrance is that the ease of entry of the game ball can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. do.

According to the game machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance is configured to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the game interest. Can be preferably changed.

It should be noted that "a different benefit can be given to the player when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance" means, for example, a game at the first entrance. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the big hit game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is a starting port that triggers a lottery, and the other entrance is a lottery. This is the case when it is a general winning opening that does not trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 5442, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that draws a lot based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port.
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
Game information related to the progress of the game including the information of the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). With a game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
Appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player is notified. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without giving a profit.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance during the variable display of the symbol, but no profit has been given yet, the game information is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information being played may be determined. In this case, even though there is a possibility that a profit may be given to the player, when it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the game proceeds without giving a profit to the player. It is configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, an approach enabling means (for example, a main operating a condition device) for enabling the entry of a game ball at least for the first entrance and the second entrance. With CPU101)
The profit-giving means
When the game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player, and the player can be given a predetermined profit.
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R jackpot game state) having a profit degree higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the player will play the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a larger profit may be given, and it is possible to improve the gaming interest. It becomes.

According to the first to eighth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[18-2. Ninth game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or each game table.

(Second issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table, for example, an abnormality may occur in the gaming setting value or the like, and the security is perfect. Is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving security.

In order to solve the second problem, a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that draws a lot based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440).
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
With appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / non-suitability of the game information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving the game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information is inappropriate while the symbol variation display is being performed, it is assumed that the symbol variation display has been performed. The game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), suitability / unsuitability of the gaming information may be determined when the variable display of the symbol is performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is disallowed even if the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It becomes possible to improve.

According to the ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

[18-3. Tenth game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or each game table.

(Third issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, changing the ball ejection tendency according to the set value does not necessarily have a light design load. It's hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem, a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A random number generating means for generating a random number with a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 that generates a random number value by executing a program) and
Random number extraction means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S73) that extracts random numbers based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
With a table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) that stores a lottery table (for example, a big hit random number determination table) that defines a total random number (for example, a range of random numbers for big hit determination) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data). ,
A lottery (for example, the process of step S118) is performed using the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means, and when the extracted random numbers are specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data), the special gaming state is controlled. Possible special game state control means and
With
The table storage means
A lottery table in which at least the total number of random numbers is different according to the set value set by the setting change control means is stored.
The random number generation means
It is characterized in that it is configured to generate a total random number of a number specified in the lottery table according to a set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (that is, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot determination) having more digits than the numerator (number of jackpot determination value data)) Since the jackpot probability) will be changed, it is possible to set the jackpot probability for each set value more finely than the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the random number for jackpot judgment as a fixed value. It will be possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
When a random number is extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, an appropriate determination means (step) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the total random number generated by the random number generation means by the time the variable display of the symbol is started. The main CPU 101) that performs the processing of S72 and step S82, and
When the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, the game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so as not to proceed, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the total random number generated by the random number generating means is determined to be inappropriate, the game is configured so that the game cannot proceed. Therefore, the set value is ensured while ensuring security. It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each.

According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[18-4. 11th and 12th gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or each game table.

(Fourth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, while the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, the player becomes suspicious because the ball ejection tendency can be arbitrarily set. , There is a risk that the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting. There is.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-4-1. Eleventh game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of winning openings including a starting opening (for example, first starting opening 5442, second starting opening 440, general winning openings 53 to 56) provided in the game area,
A privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 350) that grants a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the acceptance of a game ball in any of the plurality of winning openings.
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118).
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) at which at least a pattern variation effect performed based on the result of the lottery is performed, and
When the symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening among the plurality of winning openings A setting suggesting means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of suggesting set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means based on the acceptance of the game ball.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, setting change control is performed based on the fact that a gaming ball is accepted in a specific winning opening when a symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since the set value information about the set value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming suspicious. In addition, if the pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
Specific mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) for determining whether or not to perform the variation effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect), and
When it is determined by the specific mode determining means that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific mode, the specific winning opening determining means for randomly determining any one of the plurality of winning openings in the specific winning opening. (For example, main CPU 101) and
Is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific winning opening is not a fixed winning opening but is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning openings, so that it is possible to enhance the game interest. It is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning openings are kept secret without being disclosed. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, it is set by the setting change control means. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the game information is stored when the pattern variation effect is performed or when the game ball is accepted in a specific winning opening but the set value information is not yet suggested. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the set value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the set value set by the setting change control means is used. It is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information of. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem, a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-4-2. 12th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 5442, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that draws a lot based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port.
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). Main CPU 101) to execute and
A setting for a set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition for accepting a game ball to the starting port (for example, the overflow point reaches a predetermined point). A setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of suggesting value information, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the current setting value (setting value set by the setting change control means) is based on satisfying the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the gaming ball to the starting port. Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming a suspicious demon. In addition, the execution of the game is urged so that the game ball is accepted at the starting port. It should be noted that "satisfying the predetermined conditions for accepting the game ball to the starting port" is held because, for example, the holding limit was reached even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. It is assumed that there is no such thing, or that points are accumulated and the points reach the specified points when the game ball is not held because it was held at the upper limit even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. However, it is not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
With more
The game control means
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is accepted at the start port (). For example, even if the overflow point reaches a predetermined point, the game progress disallowance means (for example, the game progress disapproval means) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. , The main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S722.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball is accepted at the start port, in the determination of suitability / unsuitability of the game information performed by the game ball being accepted at the start port. If it is determined to be unsuitable, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the eleventh gaming machine and the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

[18-5. 13th game machine]

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or each game table.

(Fifth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table, there is a risk that the ball ejection management will not be easy.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
A payout means (for example, a payout device 350) that pays out the game medium based on a prize as a result of the game,
A special game execution means (for example, a special game execution means) capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of winning is increased based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition being a specific result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 10 and
A data aggregation means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of aggregating data related to the game medium paid out by the payout means, and
A data display control means (main CPU 101) that displays the data aggregated by the data aggregation means in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334), and
With
The data aggregation means is
A total history aggregation means that aggregates the data based on the total game history,
It has a history totaling means for each set value that aggregates the data based on the game history for each set value.
The data display control means
A gaming machine characterized in that the data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and / and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means can be displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to display one or both of the data aggregated by the total history aggregation means and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means. Ball management can be easily performed.

According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

[18-6. 14th game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so that the storage means for storing the effect data necessary for executing the effect can be exchanged. Is no longer necessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a risk that it will be uninteresting just by changing the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game can be played according to the set value. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 6-step setting values of settings 1 to 6) having different values.
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game in a game-like manner based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
With
The game control means
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, processing of step S73, step S83, and step S118) based on the game characteristics according to the set value set by the setting change control means.
Based on the result of the lottery, a special game executing means capable of executing a special game (for example, the jackpot game control of FIG. 10) in which a privilege according to a set value set by the setting change control means is given, and a special game executing means.
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to execute a game with different game characteristics based on the set value set by the setting change control means with one gaming machine, and the game machine management manager or the like can execute the game. It is possible to have a wide range of ways to utilize the game machines.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game control means
When the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state is obtained. The first game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes the game under the game nature (for example, ST specification) that ends the game.
When the second set value is set among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game control player (for example, main CPU 101) stage that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, probability variation loop specification), and
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the game machine of (2) above, both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are common in that they are controlled to a high-probability gaming state, but the first game control means. The high-probability game state may end halfway without continuing until the next big hit game state, and the high-probability game state is controlled to the next special game state in the game property by the second game control means. It differs greatly in that it is continuously executed until. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that look similar but are substantially different, the manager of the game machine can use the pachinko game machine in a wider range of ways. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[18-7. 15th to 26th gaming machines]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays a variable symbol based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(7th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is concern that various problems will occur, such as changes in.

Further, since the above set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person, and convenience is also required for the management.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-1. Fifteenth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
It is characterized by having a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen that limits the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that ends the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S314).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and it is possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a sixteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-2. 16th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, the setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed, and the one set value It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting the set value information of the above.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the set value information as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The display control means
A first screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 66) in which history information that does not include the set value information among the history information is displayed based on the predetermined operation. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 66) and
A second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) in which history information including at least the set value information is displayed on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 68).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the set value information are shown as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 66) showing the history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is displayed, and the first screen is displayed. On condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) in which the history information including the setting value information is displayed is displayed.

The transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the set value information together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second screen display control means
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, only when a specific condition is satisfied, a second screen showing history information including setting value information is displayed, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. It is not possible to prevent the setting value information from being browsed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, the case where an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The display control means
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and it is possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a seventeenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-3. 17th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received) A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
A display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating an effect control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. It is characterized by having an information screen display restricting means for restricting screen display (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes a hall menu display prohibition process in step S316).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, although the displayed information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the predetermined conditions are met, the information screen cannot be viewed, and even if an unauthorized person attempts to view it illegally, it cannot be easily viewed and security can be ensured. It becomes.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, an eighteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-4. 18th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
A normal screen (for example, a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a game machine administrator) can be viewed only. A display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which history information is displayed on the display means. Have,
The display control means
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on at least when the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). It is characterized in that it is configured to be displayed in.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine administrator). An information screen that can be viewed only is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and at least the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated. If not, it is configured so that it will not be displayed. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing.

By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being able to be viewed by an unspecified person when, for example, only the player who has registered as a member can view it, but as long as the member is registered, it may not be possible to view it. Since anyone can view it (that is, if they have the intention to view it), it can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by a person having authority such as a game machine administrator.

Further, since the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen limiting means for limiting the display of the information screen during the execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301). It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201) that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined, and a sub CPU 201) that executes the process of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S314.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and it is possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the nineteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-5. 19th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
A display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation, and
It has an information erasing means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes processing such as step S3066 and step S3160) that erases the history information from the second storage means when a specific operation is accepted.
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to accept the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the "clear" item) is accepted, the history information is deleted, and the specific operation is specific. It can be accepted only when the conditions are met (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to delete the history of changing the set value, checking the set value, or browsing for the purpose of fraud, such deletion cannot be executed unless specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent history from being intentionally deleted. In addition, for those who have authority, the history information can be deleted, which can enhance convenience.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means
The setting value information about the one setting value can be further transmitted, and the setting value information can be further transmitted.
The second storage means
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) in which the setting value information is included in the history information.
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that the history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The information erasing means is
When erasing the history information from the second storage means, it is characterized in that only a part of the history information stored in the second storage means can be erased as the history information.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by an authorized person, so that the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed in association with one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information (see, for example, FIG. 68). The information erasing means may delete the associated history information (for example, for each No. shown in FIG. 68), or may delete each item of the information of a plurality of items included in the history information (for example, for each item). For example, all of the date and time items, the operation type items, and the set value items shown in FIG. 68 may be deleted).

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-6. 20th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The setting operation information is
It is information that can distinguish the operation type whether it is the information indicating that the one set value has been changed or the information indicating that the one set value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means
A list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information regardless of the type of the setting operation information.
It is possible to selectively display the setting operation information, the time information, and a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting value information is displayed as history information, which corresponds to a specific type of the setting operation information. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, regardless of the type of setting operation information, the information screen of the list in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information, and the setting operation information corresponding to a specific type. Since the setting operation information, the time information, and a specific information screen in which the set value information is displayed as history information can be selectively displayed, the convenience of the operator (for example, the game machine administrator) is enhanced. Can be done.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, the case where an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The transmission means
The setting value information about the one setting value can be further transmitted, and the setting value information can be further transmitted.
The second storage means
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means
It is characterized in that an information screen including the set value information in the history information can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the 21st gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-7. 21st game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not shown, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (for example, the information screen in which the history information is shown) is displayed. For example, a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen) and
The information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S312, step S313, or step S314), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. Information screen display limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S312, step S313, or step S314).
The second storage means
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Even if the information screen is displayed a plurality of times by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it is regarded as one browsing history. It is characterized by being configured to be memorized.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, although the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and it is possible to ensure security.

Further, the information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it is recorded as one setting history information. Will be done. This makes it difficult for a person who changes settings, confirms settings, browses information screens, etc. for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create a large number of browsing histories. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or checking the set value, browsing is performed multiple times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). The effect is great because it is possible to do so and therefore it is easy to intentionally create a large number of histories.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the 22nd gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-8. 22nd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example,) that can distinguish whether the one set value has been changed or the one set value has been confirmed (for example, It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting a setting operation command).
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can be stored as history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information.
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not shown, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (for example, the information screen in which the history information is shown) is displayed. For example, it has a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen).
The second storage means
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Further, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one set value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed, while the browsing history information is displayed.
When the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, when fraud involving setting changes is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but regarding fraud that involves setting confirmation history. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. In addition, it is considered that the person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the settings rather than browsing after changing the settings. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated and one setting value is confirmed and the information screen is browsed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are both. Is displayed, and when one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. As a result, the amount of history information displayed on the display means can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the total number of histories from being unnecessarily increased, making it difficult to detect fraud.

In addition, "when the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information is displayed among the setting change history information and the browsing history information" is described as ". By storing only the browsing history information among the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed "and" both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it is stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these information may be displayed by the control by the display control means ”, but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means. Therefore, the former is preferable.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the 23rd gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-9. 23rd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
A display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation, and
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, history erasing means (for example, a history erasing means) that executes control to erase at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. , And a sub CPU 201) that executes the process of step S306.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, work RAM 203), but since there is an upper limit to the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means. If the amount of history information is large, there is a possibility that the history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to be recorded in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, new history information is recorded by erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. It prevents situations such as being unable to do so.

In addition, "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" is the second. By overwriting the new history information with respect to the history information already stored in the storage means, the history information may be deleted as a result, or the new history information is stored in the second storage means. When there is a risk of exceeding a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be erased and then the history information may be stored. Further, even when new history information is stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means when there is a risk that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the second storage means. At least a part of the existing history information may be deleted.

In addition, the setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having screen limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that ends the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S314). ..

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and it is possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the 24th gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-10. 24th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in the state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed or the setting value in the one is confirmed. A setting state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) that controls the setting confirmation state that can be performed, and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting change state and / and the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the setting change state and / and the setting It has a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of restricting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state is completed.
The display control means
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without limiting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends (for example, step S310, step S311). It is possible to execute the processing of
Even if the setting change state ends, it is possible to control so that the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends ( The process of steps S311 to S314 can be repeated).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed as history information on the information screen, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, security is ensured that, for example, an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. Moreover, at least when controlled to the setting change state, the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as the predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time elapses after the setting change state ends. , It is also possible to improve the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means
At least when the one set value is changed, the set value information about the one set value can also be transmitted.
The display control means
In the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, the information screen in which the setting value information for the one setting value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when displaying the history screen, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that a person with authority can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The display control means
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means, the information screen is displayed. It is characterized by having a forced termination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S314).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forced when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means. Because it ends in a targeted manner, the execution of the game is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the convenience of operation by an authorized person and to suppress fraud by an unauthorized third party while ensuring the state in which the game can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
On the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, it is possible to grasp that the game is in a state in which the game can be executed without interfering with the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example,). , While the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the LED 25 is fully lit in white, while the LED 25 is fully lit in red when the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed.)
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed without preventing the predetermined operation related to the information screen from being performed. Since it is possible to grasp that the game is to be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed without being able to grasp the game even though the game can be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the 25th gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-11. 25th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
In the setting state, there is a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen, a hall menu item screen) on which various information can be displayed on the display means. death,
The information screen is
A history screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall) in which the history information is displayed by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. Has multiple information screens, including at least a menu screen)
The display control means
A screen update means (for example, a step) for controlling the display of another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while the information screen of any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display means. Sub CPU201) that executes processing such as S3051, step S3057, and step S3073)
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, the hall menu display process in step S302 is executed. When none of the items is selected in the process of step S303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed.) On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or longer. For example, it is characterized by having a specific display control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S3072) that controls the display of the history screen to be terminated.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed as history information, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been performed by viewing the history screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

In addition, the non-history screen that does not show history information is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed, but the history screen that shows history information ends if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer. do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being viewed by an unauthorized third party due to the continuous display. The above-mentioned "continuous display" includes temporarily ending the display and redisplaying. That is, it is important whether the display is displayed or the display is not performed even when the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means
At least when the one set value is changed, the set value information about the one set value can also be transmitted.
The display control means
When displaying the history screen on the display means in the set state, it is characterized in that the set value information about the one set value is also displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when displaying the history screen, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that a person with authority can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the 26th gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-12. 26th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A first control means having one storage means (for example, a main control circuit 100) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the first storage means, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the specific operating means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting changing state in which the one set value can be changed is entered. A setting change state control means to be controlled (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting change information (for example, the setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is changed, and the setting value for the one setting value. When the erasing process for erasing the information (for example, the set value information after the change when the set value is changed) and the information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting information indicating that (for example, an initialization command).
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting change information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
An information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed on the display means at least in the setting change state.
Erasing execution information notifying means capable of notifying that the erasing process has been executed (for example, the display control circuit 104, the voice control circuit 205 for controlling the voice output of the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 for controlling the lighting mode of the LED 25). And have
The erasure execution information notification means
When the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the first aspect (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) can be grasped that the erasing process is executed. The first notification means (sub CPU201) that notifies by the character display such as "RAM has been cleared", the audio output such as "RAM has been cleared", and the LED 25 is fully lit in red).
When the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, it is more difficult to grasp that the erasing process is executed so as not to hinder the visibility of the information screen than in the first aspect. A second notifying means (for example, not displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16 but only an audio output such as "setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized" and all red lighting of the LED 25). It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201) and.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information can be viewed as history information on the information screen, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, when there is a possibility that a setting value has been changed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the above fraud has been committed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, or is controlled by the setting change state. May be executed. When the erasing process is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the erasing process is executed by a third party who does not have the authority, for example, because it is notified in the first mode in which it can be grasped that the erasing process has been executed. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is done. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one setting value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second aspect, which is more difficult to grasp than the first aspect. Further, when the erasure process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the information screen showing the history information is displayed, but in the second aspect, the visibility of the information screen is not hindered. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In addition to further providing an audio output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined audio,
The second control means
Further, it has a voice control means (for example, a voice control circuit 206) capable of controlling the sound output from the voice output means.
The first notification means is
The fact that the erasing process has been executed is notified by using both the display means and the audio output means.
The second notification means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the erasing process has been executed by using only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, both the display means and the audio output means are used to notify the player. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means is used for notification, so that the visibility of the information screen is hindered. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the erasing process from being performed, and it is possible to improve the convenience and suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, an unauthorized third party.

According to the fifteenth to twenty-sixth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[18-8. 27th game machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays a variable symbol based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(8th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. Is changed, and there is a concern that various problems may occur such as the control board being replaced illegally.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the eighth problem, the 27th gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
With
The first control means
When at least the setting operation means is operated, the setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. )When,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information for the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the set value information about the one set value can be transmitted (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55). And have
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the set value information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
Based on the reception of the set value information by the receiving means, the suitability of the one set value is determined by using the received set value information and the set value information received prior to the set value information. Setting determination means (for example, sub CPU 201 for determining whether or not the previously set value and the current set value match) and
It has an abnormal time processing execution means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes a set value abnormal time processing) that executes an abnormal time processing when the setting determination means determines that the one set value is inappropriate. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability of one set value by using the set value information about one set value transmitted from the first control means a plurality of times. It becomes possible. That is, even if it is possible for the first control means to determine the suitability of one set value, for example, when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value is normal. Regardless of whether it is abnormal or abnormal, the first control means determines that one set value is normal. Therefore, by enabling the second control means to determine the suitability for one set value, for example, even when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value can be determined. It is possible to immediately discover the suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means
It is also possible to send setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the above-mentioned one setting value has been changed or confirmed.
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage means which can be stored as history information. Means (eg, work RAM 203) and
Having a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

When the transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means transmits both the setting operation information and the set value information, these information may be transmitted together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the 27th gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[18-9. 28th game machine]

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a plurality of functions in one device has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, in order to be pressed by a player and to have an impact on the player, the pachinko machine is projected to a position that greatly protrudes from the main body of the game machine regardless of the player's operation. The push button is disclosed.

(9th issue)

By the way, when checking the operation of accessories, various sensors, etc., maintainability is reduced for one device having a plurality of functions, such as a push button described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505. There is concern about the risk.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of a device having a plurality of functions in one device. be.

In order to solve the ninth problem, the 28th gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
A character that can be operated based on the result of the lottery (for example, a character 1000) and
A compound means having a plurality of functions in one (for example, an effect button 62) and
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421, etc.) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
At least, the maintenance item determining means (for example, the process of step S3084) for determining the maintenance item to be executed among the plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the accessory, the function confirmation of the composite means, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Executable sub CPU 201) and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, FIG. 74) in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the composite means, and detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected. A maintenance screen display control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3083) that displays at least a maintenance screen), and
With
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means
The combined means having one but having a plurality of functions is configured to be displayable so that an item can be selected for each function on the selection screen (for example, the item of "effect button 1" in FIG. 74). It is displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, for a compound means having a plurality of functions even though it is one, an item can be selected for each function on a selection screen in which one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The combined means
At least, it has an operation function and an effect function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery.
The maintenance item determination means is
When the operation function item (for example, effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the effect function item (for example, effect button 2) is selected. The feature is that the maintenance items related to the effect function can be determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is selected. Since it is configured to be determinable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the 28th gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.
[18-10. 29th game machine]

Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a gaming machine having a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery has been known. There is.

As this type of gaming machine, as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of a lottery, a gaming machine including a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory having different drive sources is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273).

(10th issue)
By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273, for example, which includes a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is especially noticeable when a plurality of movable objects having different drive sources may interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to reduce the troublesome maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources are provided. It is to provide a game machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, the 29th gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
The first accessory and the second accessory, which can operate based on the result of the lottery and have different drive sources,
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421, etc.) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A maintenance item determining means (for example, a step) for determining a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including at least the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Sub CPU201) capable of executing the processing of S3084 and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example,) in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected can be selected (for example). , The maintenance screen display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3083) that displays at least the maintenance screen of FIG. 74).
With
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means
Not only the operation check of the first accessory and the second accessory alone, but also the operation check when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated is selected on the selection screen. It is configured to be displayable so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of "directing accessory 1 + 2" in FIG. 74 is displayed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, not only the operation check of each of the first and second bonuses independently, but also the operation check when both the first and second bonuses are operated. Can be selected on the selection screen, so that the troublesome maintenance work can be reduced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The maintenance screen display control means
It is configured so that the operation check when the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Direction accessory 1 → 2" in FIG. 74). Items etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since the operation check when the machine is operated can be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesome maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a third accessory that can operate based on the result of the lottery and has a different drive source from both the first accessory and the second accessory is provided.
The maintenance screen display control means
When there is a possibility that the first accessory and / and the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory and / and the second accessory The selection screen is configured to be displayable in a manner in which neither the third accessory nor the third accessory can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of "directing accessory 1 + 3" in FIG. 74 cannot be selected. )
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility that the first accessory and / or the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory is displayed on the selection screen. Since it is not possible to select a mode in which either the 1st accessory or / or the 2nd accessory and the 3rd accessory are operated, it is possible to improve maintainability.

According to the 29th gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[18-11. 30th and 31st gaming machines]

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays a variable symbol based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(11th issue)

By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the payout of balls. However, for example, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the thirtieth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-11-1. 30th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, a state control means (for example, a state control means that controls the setting changing state in which the one set value can be changed). , The main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S24,
The state control means
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is controlled to the setting change state. It is possible to restore power in the above-mentioned setting change state when the power supply is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if, for example, a power failure occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored in the state where the setting is changed when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is maintained properly. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The control means
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one setting value is changed in the setting change state, the setting value fixing means (for example,) for fixing the one setting value to the changed setting value. , Further has a main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2480.
The set value determining means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. After that, when the OFF operation is further performed, the above-mentioned one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is made. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the thirty-first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-11-2. 31st game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means having the means (for example, the main control circuit 100) and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
The state after the power is turned on according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means, the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed and the one setting. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing processes such as step S24, step S26, and step S28) that can control any of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state in which a value can be confirmed. death,
The state control means
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, the control is performed in one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. (For example, the processes of steps S22 to S28 are executed), and
When the power supply was stopped in the setting change state and then the power was turned on, the controllable or power supply was stopped in the setting change state regardless of the operation states of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. It is possible to restore power in the state of changing the setting at the time (for example, when NO is determined in step S21, the process of step S24 is executed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, while ensuring the convenience of the operator. That is, since the setting confirmation state is a state in which one setting value can only be confirmed and one setting value cannot be changed, for example, even if an unintended power failure occurs, one setting value cannot be changed. Is unlikely to affect. On the other hand, since the setting change state is a state in which one setting value can be changed, for example, if an unintended power failure occurs, the one setting value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is turned on after that, one of a plurality of states is set according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. By recovering the power, the convenience of the operator is ensured, and the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The state control means
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, the setting is controlled to the changed state.
The control means
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one setting value is changed in the setting change state, the setting value determination means for fixing the one setting value to the changed setting value is further added. Have
The set value determining means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. After that, when the OFF operation is further performed, the above-mentioned one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is made. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

According to the thirtieth and thirty-first gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining the set value.

[18-12. 32nd game machine]

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays a variable symbol based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(12th issue)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the payout of balls. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, a thirty-two gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
When the specific operation means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned ON, the setting change state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
Appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S721) for determining the suitability / non-suitability of the information stored in the storage means, and
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is inappropriate, it is controlled to an abnormal state (for example, a state in which the process of steps S722 to S727 is executed). Main CPU 101) that executes
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state and the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed. Control so that it cannot be performed (for example, the process of step S1790 is not executed when it is determined to be NO in step S1770), while control is performed so that the game can be executed when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on (for example, step). It is characterized by having a game execution means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S17) that executes the process of step S1790 when it is determined to be YES in S1770 and YES in step S1780).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity, and the power supply is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In that case, even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, the game cannot be executed, and the game can be executed when the setting is changed after the power is turned on. .. When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that the one setting value information stored in the storage means is abnormal, so only when the setting change state is controlled so that the one setting value is always changed. The game can be executed and the set value is maintained properly.

According to the 32nd gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of properly maintaining the set value.

[18-13. 33rd game machine]

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays a variable symbol based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a pachinko / pachislot machine manager in a hall.

(13th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is concern that various problems will occur, such as changes in.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, the thirty-third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned ON (for example, the setting key is ON), the state control means that controls the setting state so that the one set value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing processes such as step S24, step S26, and step S28) and
A game execution means that can be controlled so that the game cannot be executed in the set state but can be executed when the set state is completed (for example, the game is executed in the setting process of step S20 in which the game return process of step S30 has not yet been executed). When the setting process of step S20 is completed, the game return process of step S30 is executed to execute the power-on process that enables the game to be executed, although it cannot be done.
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, the effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed can be executed in the set state in which the game cannot be executed (for example, the setting operation effect executing means (for example). , And a sub CPU 201) that executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 in red via the LED control circuit 206.
The setting operation effect executing means is
Even if the set state ends and the game can be executed, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed until the predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a set state in which the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the set state ends and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect such fraud when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed illegally, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The setting operation effect executing means is
An aspect in which it is possible to visually grasp that the game can be executed by the effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed after the set state is completed and the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable in.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner in which it is possible to visually grasp that the game is ready to be executed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The state control means
It has a setting change state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the setting change state capable of changing the one setting value, and also has
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). With a storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state is completed. Further, it has a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of limiting the display.
The display control means
When the receiving means receives the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses. The information screen can be displayed (for example, the processing of steps S310 to S314 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the set state, and the display of the information screen is restricted when the set state is completed. Therefore, in the set state, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value by browsing the information screen showing the history information. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales. Furthermore, while the display of the information screen is restricted when the setting state ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display the information screen. Therefore, even if the fraud is committed, it is possible to easily detect the fraud and to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the 33rd gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In this embodiment, an embodiment when applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but all the inventions described in the present specification include pachinko machines, game machines, and slots without departing from the spirit of the invention. It can be applied to machines and all other gaming machines.

16 Liquid crystal display 24 Speaker 35 Power switch 101 Main CPU
103 RWM (main RAM)
201 sub CPU
203 work RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 662 Main button 664 Select button

Claims (1)

It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on the set value related to the advantage for the player, and has a storage means capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the set value. 1 Control means and
A second control means that controls the contents displayed on the predetermined display means, and
The setting operation means used for the operation related to the set value, and
Specific operating means used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means capable of supplying power to the first control means when the power is turned on,
With
The first control means
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, a state control means for controlling the setting value to a setting changing state capable of changing the set value, and a state control means.
When the setting operation means is turned off after the setting value is changed in the setting change state, the setting value determination means for fixing the setting value to the changed setting value, and the setting value determination means.
A transmission means capable of transmitting setting operation information indicating that the setting value has been changed or confirmed, and a transmission means.
Have,
The state control means
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is controlled to the setting change state. It is possible to restore power in the above-mentioned setting change state when the power supply is stopped.
The set value determining means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state and the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, when the setting operation means is further turned OFF after being turned ON. In addition, the set value can be confirmed as the set value after being changed.
The second control means
At least, the information screen in which the history information is shown as the information related to the setting operation information can be displayed by performing the first display in which the information screen is not displayed and then performing the second display in which the information screen is displayed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images